JP2020022613A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that executes a game performance capable of enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention can execute a main performance to be executed at a predetermined position of display means and an emphasis performance that emphasizes the main performance using at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means with respect to the main performance. The main performance includes a first main performance to be executed during execution of the emphasis performance and a second main performance during execution of the emphasis performance, and can change from the first main performance to the second main performance through a predetermined shift performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and more particularly to a game effect.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a starting port and a special winning opening are provided in a game area in which game balls can flow down, and a special symbol is fluctuated and displayed on a symbol display when a game ball is awarded to the starting port, and a jackpot lottery is performed. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating the lottery result, a jackpot game in which the normally closed large winning opening is opened is performed, and in the jackpot game, a large number of gaming balls You can get prize balls.

  By the way, when the special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, a game effect is produced by an image (including a moving image) displayed on the image display for effect, a sound output from a speaker, and a lighting / flashing operation of a light-emitting body such as a lamp. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

  As a game effect, after a plurality of effect symbols start changing and displaying at the same time as the change of the special symbol, a changing effect is performed in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination display mode indicating a lottery result of a jackpot lottery. In this fluctuating effect, a notice effect that indicates the expectation of the jackpot winning is performed during the fluctuating display of the effect symbol (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2010-200900 A JP 2009-268705 A

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in game effects, there is still room for improvement to enhance the interest of games.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that can enhance the interest of the game.

The present invention has the following configuration. In addition, the reference numerals have shown an example of the correspondence relationship with the components shown in the drawings for promoting understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.
The gaming machine (1) of the present invention includes an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to a game, and the effect control means includes a predetermined position (a first image display device 70) of a display means (first image display device 70). For example, a main effect (for example, an effect by a symbol display, a character display, a character display, or the like shown in FIG. 52) performed in a display region including a central region, and at least a part of the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. (For example, an effect image, an effect using a flash image, and the like shown in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect, and the main effect is performed during execution of the emphasized effect. The first main production (for example, the production by the character A shown in FIG. 73) and the second main production (for example, the production by the character B shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) performed during the execution of the emphasized production And the effect control means is capable of changing from the first main effect to the second main effect through a predetermined transition effect (for example, a chance-up notice shown in FIG. 73). It is characterized by.

  Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a game effect having an effect of visually appealing to a player, and to improve the interest of the game.

It is a figure showing an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a main control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a timer interrupt process in the main control board. It is a figure showing an input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing the 1st starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in a main control board. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the kind of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main control board. It is a figure showing the main processing in the production control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in the effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect process in the effect control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination processing in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of an icon final display mode decision table. It is a figure showing an example of a change scenario decision table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in the effect control part. It is a figure showing an example of a change pattern decision table for a reservation icon. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure showing an example of the two-step change pattern decision table for the icons concerned. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the frequency of occurrence of a hold icon display mode and a change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a figure which shows the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency of a change effect type and change effect occurrence timing. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the occurrence frequency of the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound at the time of the icon occurrence (change). FIG. It is a figure showing the main processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process in a general control part. It is a figure showing V blank interruption processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of a change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of a change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the change effect at the time of a winning. 5 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 2 of a normal change pattern 01. It is a figure showing an example of production of normal change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 1 of a character action change pattern 01. 6 is a timing chart 2 of a character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the character action change pattern 01. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 32; 5 is a timing chart 1 of a symbol action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the symbol effect change pattern 01. FIG. 37 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 36; It is a timing chart which starts a fluctuation effect from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which a variable effect is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 40 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 39; It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a fluctuation effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which the number of reservations increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart which the number of reservations increases during specific reach production. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure showing an example of production in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. FIG. 49 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 48; It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for a loss. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation effect pattern judgment table for big hits. It is a figure about a main production and an emphasis production. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production performed by pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the selection table of the suggestion effect performed by a pseudo continuous notice. It is a figure which shows the number of times of the pseudo continuous production performed by a pseudo continuous announcement, and the expectation degree of the big hit of TOTAL by a suggestion production and an emphasis production. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production performed in the reach production. It is a figure showing the selection table of the battle effect pattern of the loss SP / SPSP reach effect. It is a figure showing the selection table of the battle effect pattern of the big hit SP / SPSP reach effect. It is a figure showing a dialogue notice judgment table. It is a figure showing a chance up notice execution judgment table. It is a figure which shows a prefetch continuous notice execution determination table. It is a figure regarding the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of the look-ahead continuous notice. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of the result information production. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of the jackpot production. It is a figure regarding the display mode of an effect symbol. It is a figure about the emphasis production corresponding to the main production of the mode information production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the effect pattern of normal reach. It is a figure which shows the example of a production of the production pattern of SP / SP * SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the effect pattern in which a speech notice is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the highlighting color maintenance effect performed by pseudo continuous notice. FIG. 71 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 70; FIG. 72 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 71; It is a figure showing an example of a production of a highlight display color maintenance production performed in SP reach production. It is a figure showing the example of a production of the button change production performed in the SP reach production. It is a figure showing the example of production of the defeat production of the battle production of SP reach production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the challenge effect which arises after a reach loss. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the winning determination effect of a big hit and the victory effect of a battle effect. It is a figure showing an example of a production of a promotion production which usually occurs after a big hit. FIG. 78 is a view illustrating a continuation of FIG. 78 and illustrating an example of an effect of a repeated emphasis effect. It is a figure showing an example of a production of an effect continuous announcement production. FIG. 80 is a view illustrating a sequel to FIG. 80 and illustrating an example of an effect of a repeated emphasis effect. It is a timing chart before and after execution of a jackpot determination effect (there is a button operation). It is a timing chart before and after execution of a jackpot determination effect (there is a button operation). It is a timing chart before and after execution of a jackpot determination effect (no button operation).

(1st Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machines)
The configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 in which a game area 5a in which a game ball flows is formed.

  The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate attached to a lower front surface of a rectangular base frame whose central portion is opened in the front-rear direction, and a fixing member (for example, a nail or a fastener) is attached to an island facility of a game arcade. Fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Have been. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are provided. Maintenance and the like can be performed.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported by the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. I have. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5 a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper portion of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member (a glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like) is attached so as to close the opening from behind. The game area 5a is visible through the opening and the transparent member.

  Around the opening of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as the above, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflowing ball channel described below without entering the upper tray 11, and launch the game balls. And a firing operation device 13 capable of performing an operation.

  The sound output device 9 is provided at two places above the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and performs sound (music, sound) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening, and perform lighting effects by changing the irradiation direction and light emission color of each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled so as to be turned on / flashing when the glass frame 4 is opened or a dispensing abnormality described below occurs.

  In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion for the game balls is inclined downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. When the game balls stored in the storage portion of the upper receiving tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feeding solenoid 11b.

  Further, on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various productions described later are provided side by side. ing.

  The effect button device 16 is an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation or the like (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 for moving the effect button 17 in the up-down direction. A button driving motor 17b, a button vibration motor 17c for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibration state that vibrates in a predetermined mode, and changing the effect button 17 between an extinction state and a light emitting state for emitting light in a predetermined mode. Button light emitting LED 17d is provided for the player to input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a connected to the cross key 19 for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. The player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

  Further, a lending return operation unit 20 is provided in a portion on the right side of the upper tray 11, which can perform a lending operation of a game ball and an operation of returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When a lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the game balls are lent out by subtracting the balance stored in the storage medium received by the ball lending machine juxtaposed with the gaming machine 1. When the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation section 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine.

  Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12 is formed. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a for detecting that the lower saucer 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path, and the saucer fullness detection switch 32a detects that the lower saucer 12 is full. During this period, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 a rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a, a firing volume 15b made of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device 15c for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner are provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b operates to send out the game balls one by one.

  The handle light emitting device 15c forms a front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape bulging forward, and a plurality of LEDs are disposed in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Have been. When the LED emits light, it is possible to execute a light emission effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined mode. At the front end of the handle light emitting device 15c, an air outlet 15d serving as an outlet of the wind (air) sent from the air blower 21 described later is opened.

  On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower 21 for sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 is provided. The blower 21 includes a blower (not shown) for sending out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower, and the wind (air) blown out by the blower is provided. ) Passes through the base 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the handle light emitting device 15c, and is sent out from the air outlet 15d toward the player's hand. By operating the blowing device 21, it is possible to execute a blowing effect of sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward a hand of a player operating the firing handle 15.

  It should be noted that the blower 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13 but is provided around a decorative plate portion of the outer frame 2 or around a transparent member of the glass frame 4 to blow wind (air) toward the player. You may send it out. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

  The game board mounting frame 3 has a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a game ball launching device (not shown) for firing game balls toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for closing the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 is provided, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 is provided.

  The game board attachment portion is formed in a recessed chamber shape opening forward at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board attachment frame 3 so that the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed portion of the game board attachment portion, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. .

  The game ball launching device is a launching member (not shown) for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b for driving the launching member, and is inclined upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board 5. A launch rail (not shown) and a stopper for stopping the game ball at a launch position which is the lower end of the launch rail are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the firing position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked, and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed. 4 is released, and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a ball guide for guiding a game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. A member 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding a game ball fired by the game ball firing device to an upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a for guiding game balls flowing down to the outside of the game area (recovery portion of the game board mounting frame 3).

  At the approximate center of the game area 5a, there is provided a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 for restricting the entry of game balls into a so-called center case, and an effect space is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device (not shown) for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decoration frame 40 is provided on a side portion of the decoration frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided below the decoration frame 40. A stage unit is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the decoration frame 40 and flowing down the decoration frame 40.

  A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning ports 43 in which game balls can always win (enter) are provided at intervals below the game area 5a. When the general winning opening detection switch 43a detects a game ball that has won (entered) the ball 43, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are transferred from the game ball dispensing device (not shown) to the upper tray 11 as a prize ball. Will be paid out.

  On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, general-purpose gates 44 (general-purpose starting areas) through which game balls can pass are provided, and game balls passing through the general-purpose gates 44 are provided. When detected by the gate detection switch 44a, a normal symbol hit lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Incidentally, the winning lottery of the normal symbol will be described later.

  A first starting port 45 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can always win (enter) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage section. When a winning (entered) game ball is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the game ball payout device to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. ing. In addition to the payout of the prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is changed from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (usually winning a lottery with a symbol). A variable starting unit 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball entry) is possible or easy.

  The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball) and a second detecting port for detecting a winning of the game ball (entering a ball) to the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a, a movable member 48 for converting (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening and closing the movable member 48 are provided. ing. When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( Ball entry) is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are raised from the game ball payout device as prize balls. The tray 11 is paid out. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

  Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the general-purpose gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win (enter) a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the winning of the special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won (ball entry).

  The variable winning section 49 includes a special winning opening 50 in which a game ball can win (enter), a special winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting a winning (entering) of a game ball to the special winning opening 50, An opening / closing member 51 for converting (changing) the special winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening and closing member 51 are provided. When the special winning opening 50 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the special winning opening 50 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball (entering the ball) is performed. ) Is possible or easy.

  When a game ball that has won (entered) the special winning opening 50 is detected by the special winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are sent from the game ball dispensing device to the upper receiving tray 11 as prize balls. Will be paid out.

  On the back side of the gaming board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won and the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second A winning ball flow path (not shown) is provided for receiving the game balls detected by the starting port detection switch 47a and the special winning port detection switch 50a and causing them to flow down while being gathered.

  Downstream of the winning ball flow path, there is provided a winning confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path after being detected by the various detection switches. The winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a. Is used to determine whether or not an appropriate winning (winning) is achieved.

  Outside the game area 5a, a symbol display device including a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, and a second special symbol hold A hold display device consisting of a display 64 and a normal symbol hold display 65, a round number display 66 for displaying the number of rounds when a big hit state (special game state) occurs, a big hit game (special game) and A right-handed indicator 67 is provided for urging the player to shoot game balls toward the right area of the game area 5a during the game state.

  The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the first special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45. It is. The second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47. It is. The ordinary symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the ordinary symbol winning lottery performed on condition that a game ball wins (enters) on the ordinary symbol gate 44.

  The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the first starting port 45, a jackpot determination random value or the like (judgment information) is obtained, and the obtained jackpot determination random value and the jackpot are acquired. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing with a determination value. When the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol indicator 60 displays a variable display of the first special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

  The jackpot lottery of the second special symbol means that when a game ball wins (enters) in the second starting port 47, a jackpot determination random number value (judgment information) is obtained, and the obtained jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a “big hit” by comparing the value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display unit 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is information of the lottery result.

  The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each big hit lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the term “big hit” refers to a jackpot game (special game state) in a first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game judgment) or a second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game judgment). Means that you have acquired the right to execute. The "big hit game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the special winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

  Note that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, but even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the special winning opening 50. When nine (for example, nine) win (enter a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "big hit game (special game state)" is a game state that is advantageous to a player who easily obtains a prize ball. In the present embodiment, any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage for the player can be generated.

  The normal symbol hit lottery means that a hit determination random value is obtained when a game ball passes through the general figure gate 44, and the obtained hit determination random value is compared with the hit determination value to determine whether it is "hit". It corresponds to judging whether or not. Note that when a normal symbol hitting lottery is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, stops the normal symbol indicating the lottery result. That is, the stop display of the ordinary symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

  Note that the ordinary symbol display 62 is constituted by one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined symbol variation display. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is lit in a mode (winning mode, loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, “winning” refers to a state in which a right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) has been obtained in a normal symbol winning lottery. The term “winning game (auxiliary game)” refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined mode.

  Although the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the second opening 47 in the hitting game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time are set before the second opening 47 is reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, nine) win (enter), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends, that is, in the “winning game (auxiliary game)”, the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed. (Various display start conditions are easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

  The first special symbol holding display 63 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (the first special symbol of the first special symbol) stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the first starting port 45. This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved storages. In addition, the first hold storage is configured to store a maximum of four, but may be smaller or larger than four.

  The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball is won (enters) in the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing the variable display), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved storages. The maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, but may be smaller or larger than four.

  The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol change display) stored when a game ball is won (passed) at the general symbol gate 44. This is for displaying the number of (Public figure on-hold storage), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of (Public figure on-hold storage). It should be noted that a maximum of four general-purpose pending storages are stored, but the number may be less or more than four.

  Note that the first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the special symbol jackpot lottery is won, “7” is stopped and displayed, and if it is lost, “−” is stopped and displayed. -"May be repeated. Before the start of the special symbol change display, the previous stop result of the change display is displayed by turning on the LED. Therefore, at the start of the change display, the change display is performed by starting from the turning off of the LED. This makes it easy to grasp that the variable display has started.

  A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) formed of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the effect space 40a, and is provided below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) including a liquid crystal display having a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the “first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)” and the “second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)” may be collectively referred to as “image display device”.

  The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, there is a customer waiting demonstration effect that is executed when the special symbol variable display is not performed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the special symbol variable display is performed, or a notice by a character. There are directing.

  Further, the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) drives a panel drive constituted by a solenoid, a motor, and the like during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect can be performed by moving with the device 75 (see FIG. 2).

  Specifically, a standby position (first position) located closer to an end (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a center position (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Is moved up and down (up and down) with the effect position (second position) located at the position. Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the moving effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  In the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three rows of variable display areas such as a left area, a center area, and a right area are formed. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from the top to the bottom in the present embodiment), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

  The effect symbol 70a is composed of symbols indicating numbers from “1” to “9”, for example, and the special symbol display executed by the first special symbol indicator 60 or the second special symbol indicator 61 is displayed. In response to (synchronous), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a fluctuating manner. That is, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The effect symbol 70a may be composed of a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F", a symbol indicating a number, a symbol having a character image combined with a symbol indicating the alphabet, or the like.

  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (losing mode, big hit mode) indicating the result of the big hit lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of effect symbols having regularity such as "213", and the losing mode is other modes. is there. In addition, the mode of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

  During the fluctuation display of the effect design 70a, various effect images such as a reach effect, a background image, and a character, and a movie are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) or the second image display in accordance with the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the degree of expectation of the player for generating a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit winning expectation”) is increased.

  Here, the reach effect is to give the player a sense of expectation to win the jackpot, in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of “777” is set as a combination of the effect symbols 70a that notify the jackpot (big hit result mode), the two effect symbols 70a are “7” in the left area and the right area. "Temporarily stops and the remaining effect symbols 70a fluctuate in the central area.

  In addition, the temporary stop means that the effect design 70a swings small and the effect design 70a is deformed small, so that the player is made to appear as if the effect design 70a is stopped (not completely stopped). ).

  In the present embodiment, there are four types of reach effects, “normal reach effect”, “SP reach effect”, “SPSP reach effect”, and “full rotation reach effect”.

  The normal reach effect is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, the two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the central area. Reach directing.

  The SP reach effect is a movie (moving image, movie, longer) than the movie related to the normal reach effect, with two effect symbols 70a temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central area. Animation, etc.).

  The SPSP reach effect is that the two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is fluctuated in the central area, and is longer than the movie related to the SP reach effect (long-form). It is a reach production where a movie (moving image, animation, etc.) flows.

  The full-rotation reach effect is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify the jackpot are prepared. In the present embodiment, a reach effect that is executed only when a jackpot lottery is won.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full-rotation reach effect (big hit decision).

  Also, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved storages, is displayed. And a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved storages. And an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

  The first reserved icon display area 70B is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. On the display units 70B1 to 70B4, the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed. That is, the number of the first reserved icons increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reservation number (U1).

  More specifically, first holding icon H11 indicating first holding storage in which the first special symbol change display is first performed is displayed on first display portion 70B1, and 2nd holding icon H2 is displayed on second display portion 70B2. Firstly, a first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold storage in which the first special symbol change display is executed is displayed, and third change display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display portion 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold storage is displayed, and the first display icon H14 indicating the first hold storage in which the fourth special symbol variation display is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Is done.

  The second reserved icon display area 70D is partitioned in the form of a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. On the display units 70D1 to 70D4, a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed. That is, the number of the second reserved icons corresponding to the increase / decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is also increased / decreased.

  More specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second holding icon H21 indicating a second holding storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2nd holding icon H21. Secondly, the second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 executes the third variable display of the second special symbol. A second holding icon H23 indicating the second holding storage is displayed, and a second holding icon H24 indicating the second holding storage in which the fourth special symbol change display is executed fourthly is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Is done. In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol holding number” may be referred to as “first holding number”, and the “second special symbol holding number” may be referred to as “second holding number”.

  The icon display area 70C displays the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH is displayed by moving (shifting) the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the display area 70D1, and the icon is displayed at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). TH disappears (erases). In addition, the icon may be deleted in the middle of the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the “first reserved icon”, the “second reserved icon”, and the “icon” may be collectively referred to as an “icon”.

  The movable effect member 73 emits light by the panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (eg, LEDs) during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A light emission effect can be performed, and a movement effect can be performed by moving the panel drive device 75 including a solenoid and a motor.

  Specifically, a light emission effect is performed by emitting a plurality of lamps (LEDs or the like) in a predetermined light emission color in accordance with the progress of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Further, the standby position (first position) is located closer to the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and is located closer to the center (lower) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). The movement effect is performed by moving (elevating, descending) in the up-down direction with respect to the effect position (second position). In addition, you may comprise so that a light emission effect and a movement effect may be performed by operation of the effect button 17.

  The back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5 is supplied from a game ball payout device, an island facility, and the like for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending). A game ball storage unit (not shown) for storing game balls and supplying them to the game ball payout device, a main control device (not shown) having a main control board 110 for integrally controlling the progress of the game, and a main control board A payout control device (not shown) including a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and effects control in response to an effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device (not shown) incorporating an effect control board 130, a power supply device (not shown) incorporating a power supply substrate 160 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices, and game information ( Game signal) Game information output terminal board 90 for are provided.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, a control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

  The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a main control one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing. 110 m, an input port and an output port for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs an arithmetic process related to a game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling the controlled device (various solenoids and various displays). ) And transmits a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is based on the main control board. A command (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detecting switch 43a, a gate detecting switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a big winning opening detecting switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detecting switch 52a. , A magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, a RAM clear switch 55a, a payout control board 120, and the like. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input ports, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

  The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, a special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special opening. The symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, the ordinary symbol hold display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right-hand display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the effect control board 130, etc. are connected. I have. A drive control signal for controlling various solenoids, a display control signal for controlling various displays, and a game information output terminal board 90 for notifying the outside of the gaming machine 1 (such as a hall computer) via an output port. Information and the like are output.

  The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of a payout command from the main control board 110 and controls the emission of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device to control the payout of the game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a for performing arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing, input ports and output ports for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs a calculation process regarding payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and controls the game ball payout device. Or a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

  An open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101, and the like are connected to input ports of the payout control unit 121. The payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121.

  When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of the number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is finished.

  The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b.

  When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the firing control unit 122 allows energization to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and launches. When detecting that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed according to a detection signal from the volume 15b, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven, and the firing solenoid is set so that the firing handle 15 has a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. The game ball is fired by driving 28b.

  The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft, and the launching member 28 is rotated by the rotation of the rotating shaft to launch a game ball. The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so that the game ball is fired for one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

  The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls an effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes an effect control unit 130m including a sub CPU 130a for performing an operation process, a sub ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, and a sub RAM 130c serving as a work area during the operation process, and a first image display device 70 (main Liquid crystal), a display / audio control unit 140 for controlling the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., a frame lighting device 74, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving motor 17b, a blower A lamp / drive control unit 150c for controlling the device 21, the board lighting device 74, the board drive device 75, and the like, and an effect control input port and an output port are provided.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs an operation process related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, so that the command received from the main control board 110 And control for causing various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the camera and effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. (Output data and commands).

  The effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, a process for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

  The display / voice control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m and performs control to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

  The display / voice control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 storing an overall control program, an overall control unit 141 including an overall RAM 144 that is a work area for the arithmetic processing, and a VDP (VDP as an image processor). A video display processor), a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. A VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 storing voice data and the like, an input / output port, and the like.

  The overall CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the overall ROM 143, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the overall RAM 144 as a work area, thereby receiving from the effect controller 130m. In accordance with an effect instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various effects (data and commands are output).

  The general ROM 143 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list including a group of drawing control commands, and animation of the effect pattern. Animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

  The animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting the specific contents of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes a weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method , The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) include various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of luminance.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various types of image data are stored, and commands (display lists, drawing commands, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (the general CPU 142) and the CGROM 146 are stored in the CGROM 146. Drawing data that is a source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the image data. The image data includes images (frames) to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display), for example, a rendered design image, a background image, a character image, and a background of the rendered design. This is material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

  The CGROM 146 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like. The CGROM 146 compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information includes color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of an image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

  Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which not all image data is compressed, but only part of the image data. As the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 147 is configured by an SRAM that writes or reads image data at high speed. The VRAM 147 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the general control unit 141 (the general CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). And the like corresponding to the frame buffer area.

  The frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are switched alternately between a “drawing frame buffer” and a “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

  Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on an instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141 (the general CPU 142). , Read drawing data from the “display frame buffer” in the frame buffer area, generate a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the read drawing data, and generate a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and The image is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

  The image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operation clock from a crystal oscillator. By dividing the operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 are operated. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the (sub-liquid crystal) is generated and output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (display of an image) is performed 30 times per second. 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) may be set so that 60 drawing (image display) is performed per second.

  The image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145 (VDP) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). The general-purpose board 72 is connected. The general-purpose substrate 72 has a bridge function of converting the image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. Absorbs the difference in resolution between when a 19 inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17 inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) is connected. .

  The sound control unit 148 is connected to the sound output device 9, and based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image data. Control is performed such that audio data, music data (BGM, SE), and the like are output from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

  The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a for performing arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b in which a lamp / drive control program is stored, a lamp RAM 150c serving as a work area for the arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs an arithmetic process relating to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. Control (output of data and commands) for causing a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various driving devices to perform a predetermined effect is performed in response to the received effect instruction command or the like.

  The input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive motor 17b, the blower 21, the board lighting device 74, and the board driving device 75. Based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a), lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed. To perform a lighting effect or the like, or to perform an operation effect (moving effect described above) by performing drive control of a button driving motor 17b, a blower 21 and a motor or a solenoid of a panel driving device 75 or a solenoid.

  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1 and uses the main power supply for the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board). 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

  The power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and various electronic components), and an OFF state in which the power supply is stopped. A power switch is provided. When the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started, and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

  The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1 and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 10a enters an operation stop state.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine 1 is energized. When a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110 c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is turned off (power failure), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power was turned off (power failure) after recovery from the power failure (power failure). Can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the special symbol jackpot lottery has a “low-probability gaming state” and a “high-probability gaming state”, and the state relating to the movable member 48 having the second starting port 47 is “non-time-saving game”. State "and" time saving game state ".

In the present embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-time-saving gaming state” (2) A low-probability time-saving gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “time-saving gaming state” (3) “ High-probability time reduction game state that is "high probability game state" and "time reduction game state"

  Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to a “low-probability non-time-saving gaming state”, and this gaming state is referred to as a “normal gaming state” in the present embodiment. ". In this embodiment, the “low-probability time-short game state” and the “high-probability time-short game state” may be referred to as “specific game state” because the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. is there.

  In the present embodiment, the “low-probability gaming state” refers to the jackpot winning probability in a special symbol jackpot lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. However, for example, it means a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high-probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared to the low-probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set to, for example, 1 / 59.8 as high. Say. Therefore, in the “high-probability gaming state”, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the “low-probability gaming state”. It is to be noted that the change from the low-probability game state to the high-probability game state is performed after the jackpot game is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as “probable change jackpot”. The jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as “normal jackpot”.

  In the present embodiment, the “non-time-saving gaming state” refers to the average fluctuation of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the ordinary symbol winning lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 44. This refers to a game state in which the time is set to be longer than the “time-saving game state”, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when the winning is won is easily set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 44, a normal symbol hit lottery is performed, and the ordinary symbol display unit 62 performs an ordinary symbol variation display. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be in an open state for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, the “time reduction game state” is the average fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the ordinary symbol winning lottery performed on condition that the game ball has passed through the ordinary symbol gate 44. Is set to be shorter than the “non-time-saving game state”, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a win is won is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the “non-time-saving game state”. State. Further, in the “non-time saving game state”, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the “time saving game state”, the probability of winning in a normal symbol lottery is 127/128. Set high. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the general-purpose gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled to the open mode than in the "non-time saving game state". Thus, in the "time saving game state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming the game ball.

  In the embodiment, the “time saving gaming state” is such that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery are more advantageous than the “non-time saving gaming state”. Is set to However, the “time saving gaming state” may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes advantageous. In the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a win in a normal symbol win lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, the types of jackpots will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, “first jackpot”, “second jackpot” and “third jackpot” are set. The types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 include “first jackpot” and “second jackpot”.

  The “first jackpot” is a first jackpot game in which the round winning opening 50 is opened up to 29.5 seconds and then the round winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds to perform a round game up to 10 times. It is a jackpot. In the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

  After the end of the first big hit game, a high-precision time-saving game state is set until the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are changed and displayed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is substantially determined based on the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state.

  The “second jackpot” is a jackpot for executing a second jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to ten times. After the end of the second big hit game, a low-probability time-saving game state is set until the change display of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

  The “third jackpot” is a jackpot for executing a third jackpot game in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-precision time-saving game state is set until the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are changed and displayed 10,000 times. Therefore, the next jackpot is substantially determined based on the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state.

  It should be noted that the number of times of display (100 times, 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-precision time-short game state, low-accuracy time-short game state) set after the end of the jackpot game is referred to as “high probability number” or “ ".

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are used. However, the number of types is not limited to three, and may be smaller or larger than three. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 of the special winning opening 50 is 29.5 seconds for any one of the first to third jackpots, but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, The opening time may be different depending on the round game.

(Type of hit)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

  In the present embodiment, based on the passing of the game ball to the general-purpose gate 44, the types of winning that can be won in the winning lottery are "first hit" and "second hit", If the gaming state when the winning lottery is executed is "non-time saving game state", it is "first hit", and if it is a time saving gaming state, it is "second hit".

  The “first hit” is a hit in which a first hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened up to a maximum of 0.2 seconds is executed. That is, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

  The "second hit" is a second hit game in which the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. . In other words, it is a game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

  In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the special winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

  As described above, in the "time saving game state", the game balls are more likely to win in the second starting port 47, and the player can advantageously play the game without consuming the game balls than in the "non-time saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart. Note that Si (i = 10, 20,...) Indicates a step.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

  First, the main CPU 110a performs an initialization process in S10. More specifically, a startup program is read from the main ROM 110b in response to power-on, and a process of initializing flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c is performed.

  In S20, the main CPU 110a updates the reach determination random number value and the special symbol determination random value for determining the special symbol variation mode (variation time). In S30, the jackpot determination initial random number value Then, an initial value random value updating process for updating the special symbol determining initial value random value, the hit determination initial value random value, and the ordinary symbol determining initial value random value is performed.

  Next, in S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power interruption (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to S20, and the power failure detection signal Is input, the flow shifts to S41.

  The main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt in S41, performs a process of clearing an output port in S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c and stores it in a predetermined storage area in S43. In step S44, a process of turning on a backup flag to be referred to at the time of restoration from a power failure is performed. In step S45, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the process waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely stopped. .

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

  First, in S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in S110, updates the special symbol time counter and updates the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory. A time control process of updating various timer counters, such as an update process of a normal symbol time counter and an update process of the opening and closing time of the movable member 48, is performed. More specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, or a start port closing timer counter is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines the random number for the jackpot determination, the random number for determining the special symbol, the random number for determining the special symbol variation pattern, the random number for determining the hit, the random number for determining the ordinary symbol, and the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern. A specific random number value update process for updating is performed. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, the countermeasure is taken. The new random number value is newly updated by setting the initial random number value to be used as a new round initial value.

  The main CPU 110a, in S130, updates the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for ordinary symbol determination, as in S30. Perform random value update processing.

  In S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, the special winning opening detecting switch 50a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the gate detecting switch 44a, the winning confirming detecting switch 52a, etc. It is determined whether or not an input has been made to the switch, and when there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed.

  In S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (big hit determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening and closing control of the special winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), control of a game state, and the like. I do.

  In S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol storage control process (such as a hit determination), a normal symbol display control, an opening / closing control of the second starting port 47 (the movable member 48), and the like.

  Next, in S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or award ball counters (three award ball counters, ten award ball counters, etc.). With reference to the ball counter and the fifteen prize ball counters), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 is performed. Thereby, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device.

  In S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and produces a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio abnormality error designation command. A magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting to the control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic abnormality error designation command and the radio wave abnormality designation command, it performs control for performing the magnetic abnormality error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

  The main CPU 110a, in S700, external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, starting opening / closing data output to the second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b, and a big prize to be output to the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b. Mouth opening / closing data, special symbol display data to be output to the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold display 63 and (2) A data creation process for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 64 and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65 is performed.

  In S800, the main CPU 110a performs a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, starting opening / closing data, and special winning opening / closing data created in S700, special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, and special symbol holding display. A display output process for outputting data, a signal such as normal symbol hold display data, a payout command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, An output control process is executed to execute an effect command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area to the effect control board 130.

  Note that the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process in the main control board 110.

  In S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In the general winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detecting switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no input of a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to S220.

  When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating the 10 winning balls is updated by adding the data indicating the 10 winning balls to the general winning opening counter (10 winning ball counters) used for the winning balls. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of gaming balls entering the winning port and updating (D ← D + 1), the general winning port detection switch input processing is terminated.

  In S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. In the special winning opening detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 50. If no detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to S230.

  When the detection signal is input from the special winning opening detection switch 50a, the data indicating the fifteen prize balls is updated by adding to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the special winning opening used for the prize balls. Then, “1” is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of gaming balls entering the winning opening and updated (D ← D + 1) to determine whether the current gaming state is the special gaming state. Is determined. When the current gaming state is the special gaming state, "1" is added to the round winning counter (C) for counting the gaming balls that have won the special winning opening 50 and updated (C ← C + 1), The special winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

  If the current gaming state is not in the special gaming state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of gaming balls that have won (entered) a specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winable period. The counter (E) is updated by adding “1” (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning prize counter (E) is greater than a prescribed number (for example, 10). When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the special winning opening detection switch input processing ends.

  If the value of the illegal prize ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, an illegal prize (illegal prize ball) is designated as an illegal prize (illegal prize ball) in which a game ball wins (enters) outside the prize period. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the illegal winning error designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the fact that the production control board 130 notifies the illegal winning error that the illegal winning has occurred is notified.

  Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the special winning opening detection is performed. The switch input processing ends. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

  In S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In the first starting port detection switch input processing, it is determined whether the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 45.

  In S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting port detection switch input process. In the second start-up opening detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start-up opening detection switch input process is performed.

  The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the ordinary figure gate 44. If the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has not been input, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary figure holdings, which is the number of ordinary figure holdings stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, is less than four. If the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  If the number of reserved ordinary figures is less than 4, add “1” to the number of reserved ordinary figures and update it. Then, the random number for hit determination, the random number for determining the normal symbol, and the random number for determining the general figure variation pattern are updated. The obtained random number values are sequentially searched from the first storage unit in the obtained symbol storage area, and the obtained random number value is stored in the empty storage unit, and the gate detection switch input processing ends.

  The main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process in S260. In the prize confirmation detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the prize confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the prize ball flow path. If the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has not been input, the input control process ends.

  When the detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a is input, the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D ← D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) is increased to the upper limit. (For example, 20) and a lower limit (for example, -10).

  If the value of the winning ball counter (D) is not within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is determined that an abnormal winning (winning) has occurred, and the error specifying command for abnormal winning is stored in the transmission data storage area for effect. The external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the winning ball counter (D) is cleared, and the winning confirmation detecting switch is set. The input processing ends. It should be noted that the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the abnormal winning error designation command performs an abnormal winning error notification to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
With reference to FIG. 6, the first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  The main CPU 110a determines in S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the first near-shore detection signal is input. The starting port detection switch input processing ends.

  In S230-2, the main CPU 110a adds and updates the data indicating the three prize balls to the three prize ball counters used for the prize balls, and in S230-3, wins (wins) the winning opening. "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of completed game balls and updated (D ← D + 1).

  In S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol holding number (U1), which is the number of first holding symbols stored in the first special symbol holding storage area, is less than four. If the first special symbol hold number (U1) is less than four, the process proceeds to S230-5, and if the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not less than four, the first start opening of this time is executed. The detection switch input processing ends.

  In S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding “1” to the first special symbol holding number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in S230-6, updating the first special symbol holding after updating. A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information (the random number value for the jackpot determination, the random number value for the special symbol determination, the random number value for the reach determination, and the random number value for the special figure variation pattern determination), and obtains the first special symbol. The vacant storage units are sequentially searched from the first storage unit in the reserved storage area, and the acquired special figure determination information is stored in the vacant storage unit.

  As described above, the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area stores the special figure determination information (the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for determining special figure variation pattern). ) Is stored.

  The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in S230-8. In the first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol variation display based on the determination information is performed. Judgment is performed, and a planned variation pattern that is a variation pattern to be executed is determined.

  In S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting port winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for effect, and The starting port detection switch input processing ends.

  As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start opening winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first starting opening winning designation command makes the first start opening winning. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined look-ahead announcement effect is provided from before the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening winning designation command is started to one or a plurality of variation displays executed before that. Can be performed. The prefetch notice effect is performed using one or more of the image display devices 70 and 71, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable effect member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

  The second starting port detection switch input processing includes the first starting port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol holding storage area, the first holding storage, the first special symbol holding number (U1), and the first special symbol storing designation. The command, the first preliminary determination process, and the first starting opening winning designation command are respectively transmitted to the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the second special symbol holding storage area, the second holding storage, the second special symbol holding number (U2), It may be replaced with a special symbol storage designation command, a second pre-judgment processing, and a second starting opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special power control processing of main control board)
With reference to FIG. 7, the special figure special electric power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special power processing data, and in S302, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded special figure special power processing data. If the special figure special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination is performed. The process proceeds to the process (S310). If the special figure special power process data = 1, the process proceeds to the special symbol variation process (S320). If the special figure special power process data = 2, the process proceeds to the special symbol stop process (S330). If the special figure special power processing data = 3, the processing is shifted to the big hit game processing (S340), and if the special figure special power processing data = 4, the processing is shifted to the big hit game end processing.

  This "special figure special power processing data" is set as needed in each subroutine of the special figure special power control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

  In S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a big hit, determining a type of a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining a variation time of the special symbol.

  Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol holding number (U2) is equal to or more than "1", and if the second special symbol holding number (U2) is not equal to or more than "1". It is determined whether or not the first special symbol hold number (U1) is equal to or greater than "1", and if the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not equal to or greater than "1" ("0"). Determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the special symbol variation display and the customer winning state in which the big hit game is not executed is the customer waiting state determination flag is “0”.

  When the customer waiting state determination flag is “0”, it is determined that the customer waiting state has started and the customer waiting state designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect, and the special figure special power processing data = 0 is maintained. If the special symbol storage determination process is terminated and the customer waiting state determination flag is not “0”, it is determined that the customer waiting state has already been started, and the special figure special power process = 0 is maintained. The symbol storage determination process ends.

  When the second special symbol hold number (U2) is equal to or more than “1”, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, and then the value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. The various random number values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, and the second random number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. 2. Set a special symbol storage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. More specifically, the special symbol determination random number value among the various random number values (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the zero storage unit in the second special symbol holding storage area and the current probability game state Based on the (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether the game is a "big hit" or a "losing" in which a big hit game is to be executed.

  On the other hand, if the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not equal to or greater than “1” and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is equal to or greater than “1”, the first special symbol hold storage area is used. After subtracting “1” from the stored value, the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol holding storage area are shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after the subtraction is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination for determining whether to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value of the various random number values (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the zero storage unit in the first special symbol holding storage area and the current probability game state Based on the (low-probability game state, high-probability game state), it is determined whether the game is a "big hit" or a "losing" in which a big hit game is to be executed.

  Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, the large hit determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. A special jackpot symbol or a special losing symbol is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol, and an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

  When the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area, the big hit symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, losing special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and an effect symbol designating command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in an effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, the large hit determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. A variation pattern of a special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value, and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  When the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the zero storage unit of the first special symbol storage area, the reach determination unit stored in the zero storage unit is used. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value and the special figure variation random number value, and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Then, the main CPU 110a sets, in a predetermined processing area, variable display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to perform the variable display (LED blinking) of the special symbol.

  Thus, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created, and the created data is output in S700, so that the first special symbol display 60 Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

  Then, the special figure special power processing data = 0 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 1, and preparations are made to proceed to a subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing ends.

  In S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation processing of this time is terminated while maintaining the special figure special power processing data = 1.

  When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 60 or the second special symbol indicator 61 as the jackpot special symbol or the losing special symbol. The special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. Thereby, the result of the jackpot determination is notified to the player.

  Then, the special figure special power processing data = 1 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 2, and preparations are made to proceed to the special symbol stop processing subroutine, and the current special symbol variation processing is ended.

  In S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing of this time is ended while maintaining the special figure special power processing data = 2.

  When the stop time has elapsed, the time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the time saving counter when 0 <the number of time savings, and the time saving game flag is cleared when the number of time savings = 0, and high when 0 <the high probability number. The probability counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

  Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a special jackpot symbol. In the case of a special jackpot symbol, the time-saving game flag, the high-probability game flag, the time-saving number counter, and the high-probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special power processing data is set from 2 to the special figure special power processing data = 3 Then, preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game processing subroutine, and this special symbol stop processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special figure special power processing data = 2 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 0, and preparations are made to proceed to a subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing. To end.

  In S340, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game process for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of the special jackpot symbol (stop symbol data) set in S310. .

  Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the big hit game is set in a special game timer counter, and the driving data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

  During this opening, when a specified number of game balls win (enter) or the opening time of the special winning opening 50 elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), The output of the drive data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. Thereby, one round game ends. Further, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

  When a predetermined number of round games (4 or 16 times in the present embodiment) are completed, the data stored in the number of round games (R) storage area is cleared, and the special map special power processing data = 3 to The figure special power processing data is set to 4, and preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game end processing subroutine, and the current jackpot game processing ends.

  In S350, the main CPU 110a determines one of the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state and performs a jackpot ending process of determining one of the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state. .

  Specifically, based on the type of the special jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in S310, setting of a high-probability game flag, setting of a high-probability count, setting of a time-short game flag, and setting of a time-short count are performed. The special figure special power processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special power processing data = 0, and preparations are made to proceed to a subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the current big hit game end processing ends.

(Explanation of commands related to production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from main control board 110 to effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams illustrating types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

  The “first special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. "DATA" information is set in accordance with.

  When the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases, the first special symbol storage designation command corresponds to the first special symbol storage number corresponding to the increased or decreased storage number in S230 or S310. The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

  The “second special symbol storage designation command” indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area. “MODE” is set to “E0H”, and the number of reserved memories is set. "DATA" information is set in accordance with.

  When the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area increases or decreases, the second special symbol storage designation command corresponds to the second special symbol corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of hold storage in S240 or S310. The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

  In the present embodiment, the “first special symbol storage designation command” and the “second special symbol storage designation command” may be collectively referred to as a “special symbol storage designation command”.

  The “effect design specification command” indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. For the first special symbol, “MODE” is set to “E1H”, and for the second special symbol, “MODE” is set. Is set as “E2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of the special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol determines the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot game, the rendering symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the end of the jackpot game. It can be said that.

  In this effect design designation command, when various special symbols are determined, and when the special symbol change display is started, the effect design designation command corresponding to the special symbol is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S310. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and “MODE” is set to “E3H”, and various variations are set. Information of “DATA” is set according to the pattern.

  This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the first special symbol display device 60 starts displaying the special symbol variation, and in step S310, the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations are set. Information of “DATA” is set according to the pattern.

  The second special symbol variation pattern designation command is used when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol display 61 is started, and the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern in the above S310. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  In this embodiment, the “variation pattern specification command for first special symbol” and the “variation pattern specification command for second special symbol” may be collectively referred to as a “variation pattern specification command”.

  The "special symbol determination command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

  When the special symbol determination command is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, the special symbol determination command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S320. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “ordinary symbol confirmation command” indicates that the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and “MODE” is set to “E5H” and “DATA” is set to “01”.

  When the normal symbol is stopped on the normal symbol display 62, the normal symbol determination command sets the normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S400, and performs the effect in the output control process of S800. This will be transmitted to the control board 130.

  The “starting port winning designation command” is information for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance. If the command is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, “ If "MODE" is set to "E6H" and the game is based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set to "E7H", and information of "DATA" is set in accordance with various winnings. Is set.

  When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the starting port winning designation command corresponding to the starting winning information in the above-mentioned S230 or S240 is the starting port winning designation command for the production of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “big hit opening designation command” indicates that various big hit games (special game state) are started, “MODE” is set to “E8H”, and “DATA” is set according to the type of big hit game. Information is set.

  When the various jackpot games are started, the jackpot opening designation command for the type of the jackpot game is set in the rendering transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S330, and the output control process of S800 is performed. Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, “MODE” is set to “E9H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

  When the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S340, and the production is performed in the output control process of S800. This will be transmitted to the control board 130.

  The “big hit ending designation command” indicates that various big hit games have been completed, and “MODE” is set to “EAH”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of big hit game. I have.

  When the various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending designation command sets the jackpot ending designation command corresponding to the type of the jackpot game in the transmission data storage area for effect in the above-mentioned S340. This will be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of retained symbols stored in the ordinary symbol reserved number (G1) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "ECH". DATA ”information is set.

  When the value stored in the ordinary symbol hold number (G1) storage area is increased or decreased, the ordinary symbol storage designation command is the ordinary symbol designation command corresponding to the increased or decreased retained memory number in S250 or S400. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “ordinary symbol designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62. “MODE” is set to “EDH”, and “DATA” is set in accordance with the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.

  When the ordinary symbol is determined and various symbols are determined and the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started, the ordinary symbol designation command corresponding to the ordinary symbol is set in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c in S400. Then, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “normal figure change designation command” indicates the change time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and “MODE” is set to “EEH”, and “DATA” is set in accordance with the change time of various normal symbols. Information is set.

  When the ordinary symbol variation designation command is started, the ordinary symbol variation designation command corresponding to the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S400. In the output control process of S800, the image is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “winning opening designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games are started, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of the auxiliary game. .

  When the auxiliary game starts, the winning opening designation command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S400, and the output control in S800 is performed. In the process, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The “winning ending designation command” indicates that various auxiliary games have been completed, “MODE” is set to “EFH”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of auxiliary game. .

  When the various auxiliary games are completed, the winning ending specification command corresponding to the type of the auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S400, and the output of S800 is performed. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the control processing.

  The “game state designation command” indicates whether or not the game mode is the time-saving game state or the high-probability game state. “MODE” is set to “F0H”, and “MODE” is set according to each game state. DATA ”is set.

  The game state designation command is used when the special symbol starts changing, when the special symbol ends changing (when the big hit game starts), and when the big hit game ends, the game state corresponding to the game state in S310, S330, and S350. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  The “power-on designation command” and the “power-restoration designation command” indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 110c, and “MODE” is “F1H”. When the main RAM 110c is initialized, “DATA” is set to “00H”, and when the main RAM 110c is not initialized, “DATA” is set to “01H-03H”.

  The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are, when the game machine 1 is powered on, the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command corresponding to the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the game state in S10. It is transmitted to effect control board 130.

  The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the customer waiting state in which the special symbol change display is not performed, "MODE" is set to "F1H", and "DATA" is set to "04H". Is set.

  This customer waiting designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in S310 when the special symbol change display is not performed, and the production control is performed in the output control processing in S800. It will be transmitted to the substrate 130.

  The “error designation command” indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of error.

  This error designation command is used when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined in the magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process in S600, or when the occurrence of an abnormal prize is determined in the winning confirmation detection switch input process in S260. When it is determined in the processing of inputting the special winning opening detection switch in S220 or in the input processing of the second starting opening detection switch in S240, the error designation command corresponding to the type of the error is stored in the effect transmission data in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of S800.

  When the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are opened, the lower tray 12 is full, and a payout abnormality is detected on the payout control board 120, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for effect transmission. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

  The “error release designation command” indicates that the error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, “MODE” is set to “F2H”, and information of “DATA” is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

  This error release designation command corresponds to the type of error that has been resolved when the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 are closed, the lower tray 12 is completely filled, and the payout abnormality is resolved in the payout control board 120. The error release designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c of the payout control board 120, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control processing of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of effect control unit 130m)
Next, a main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m. Ei (i = 10, 20...) Indicates a step.

  When a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting the timer interrupt in E10, and performs an initialization process in E20. More specifically, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b in response to power-on, the flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initialization is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interruption permission for permitting the timer interruption in E30, and performs a sub random number updating process in E40. Specifically, a process of updating various random numbers stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. Thereafter, the processing of E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130m.

  The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in E100, and performs a timer update process in E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a have been input, and a process of setting predetermined data when the input has been performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process in E150. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and a process of storing the received command in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. Do.

  The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in E200. Specifically, it determines whether or not a power-on designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if so, performs processing for performing power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), The power output sound is output from the audio output device 9.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in E250. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the power restoration designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing for performing power failure restoration notification. More specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, For example, the sound output device 9 outputs a power restoration sound.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process in E300. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer wait state designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. If the command has been received, a customer wait effect is given after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform processing to perform. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , Or output a waiting sound for a customer from the audio output device 9.

  In E350, the sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not a game state designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command has been received is described. Do.

  The sub CPU 130a performs the pending information update processing in E400. Specifically, it is determined with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command has been received. A process for updating the number of 1 special symbol reservation, the number of second special symbol reservation, the number of ordinary symbol reservation, and the like is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect process in E500. Specifically, it is determined with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c whether or not the starting opening winning designation command or the variation pattern designation command has been received. If the command has been received, processing relating to the icon change effect is performed.

  The icon change effect is a kind of a look-ahead notice effect in which the display style of the hold icon and the icon is changed, and a plurality of kinds of change timings and change modes (normal change, symbol effect change, and character effect change) are set. .

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as a “hold icon change effect” and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as the “icon change effect”.

  In E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special figure special electric production effect process. More specifically, it receives a rendering symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol determination command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, and the like with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c. It is determined whether the command is received, and if received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

  In E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal figure general electric production effect process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a general figure designation command, a general figure change designation command, a normal pattern confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, and the like have been received. Judgment is performed, and if received, processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process in E850. Specifically, it is determined whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command has been received. Is performed, and a process for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error release designation command is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in E900. Specifically, it performs processing of outputting a signal such as predetermined data or transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / audio control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150.

  In E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt processing.

(Icon change effect processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process of determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect.

  In E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process for updating (changing) the display mode of the icons already displayed (the hold icon and the icon), and ends the current icon change effect process.

(Icon change effect determination processing of effect control unit 130m)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received. If the start opening winning designation command has been received, the process proceeds to E510-2, and if the starting opening winning designation command has not been received, the current icon change effect determination process ends.

  In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start-up winning specification command to determine whether or not a big hit has occurred, the type of the big hit game, and the effect contents (scheduled variation pattern).

  In E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is the executable period of the icon change effect, the process proceeds to E510-4. If it is not the executable period of the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process ends.

  The executable period of the icon change effect indicates that the jackpot game is not being executed, that the icon change effect is not being executed, or that the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two of the above conditions may be provided. Further, conditions different from the above three conditions may be adopted.

  In E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines in E510-4 that all the preliminary determination results of the preliminary hold (hold storage corresponding to the previously received starting opening winning designation command) are equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the preliminary hold are normally changed or shortened. It is determined whether it is fluctuation or normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process proceeds to E510-5; if not all, the process proceeds to E510-8.

  The sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in E510-5, and in E510-6, The icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 14) for determining the final display mode is selected.

  The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14 and, based on the starting opening winning designation command and the icon display mode determination random value, selects one of the icon final display modes. One icon final display mode is determined.

  In E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon) which is a normal display mode as the icon final display mode.

  In E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) for executing an icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process proceeds to E510-10. If the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process proceeds to E510-13.

  In E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The change scenario indicates a transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

  In E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets the change scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 15, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

  In E510-12, the sub CPU 130a specifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing ends. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed in the first image. It is displayed on the display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the non-change scenario in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

  In E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination processing. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of E900, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) or a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all of the preliminary determination results of the preceding reservation are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance reservation does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. By doing in this way, during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is executed, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the reach effect is not executed. Causes a change in the display mode of the hold icon, and does not hinder the reach effect by the icon change effect, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the preliminary determination result of the preliminary reservation includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change production may be performed, but the preliminary determination result of the preliminary reservation includes the one that performs the reach effect. The icon change effect may be easier to be performed (is performed at a higher rate) when no icon effect is included than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

  In the icon final display mode determination table, the type of the starting port winning designation command, the random number for icon display mode determination, and the icon final display mode to be selected are associated with each other, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 14 is obtained. In this manner, the random numbers for icon display mode determination are allocated.

  In the final icon display mode, a CD icon as a normal icon and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon are set as special icons indicating that there is a possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game is executed). Have been.

  The jackpot winning expectation degree related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is determined to be a big hit. .

  Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is made different depending on the effect content. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the effect content is SP start or specific start winning information indicating that the effect is SPSP reach, it is determined that the effect content is a normal variation, a shortened variation, and a normal reach that does not reach the effect. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than the normal start winning information shown.

  In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a jackpot, but may be selected.

(Change scenario decision table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

  In the change scenario determination table, the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening winning designation command, the selectivity (%) of each scenario, and the type of the change scenario to be selected are associated. Describes a prior change in each change scenario and an update mode in the change.

  Here, the “pre-variation” refers to a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored before the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command. That is, the “fluctuation” refers to a fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

  In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during execution of the advance change (the pending icon change effect is not executed) but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is not changed). A scenario (for example, a scenario that is not executed) (for example, a scenario 02 or the like), or a scenario (for example, a pending icon change effect and the icon change effect are executed) in which the display mode of the icon changes during execution of the advance change and execution of the change , Scenario 15 etc.) are set.

  In the change scenario determination table according to the present embodiment, a scenario that changes the display mode of the icon regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the pre-change is determined. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that determines whether or not a reach effect indicating that there is a possibility that a jackpot game may be executed in advance fluctuation is performed. The scenario to be performed may be determined. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon is not changed during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that a change in the display mode occurs. Further, the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is executed more than during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set so that a change in the icon display mode occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation that is not performed.

(Update process of icon display mode of effect control unit 130m)
The icon display mode updating process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode updating process in the effect control unit 130m.

  In E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received. If a variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to E520-2. If a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the current icon display mode update process ends.

  The sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in E520-2, and determines in E520-3 whether there is a pending icon for changing (updating) the display mode. judge. If there is a hold icon for changing the display mode, the process shifts to E520-4. If there is no hold icon for changing the display mode, the process shifts to E520-7.

  In E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for the hold icon (see FIG. 17) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed.

  The sub CPU 130a determines the pending icon change pattern in E520-5. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 17, based on the change mode of the hold icon in the present fluctuation effect and the selection rate (%), a plurality of the change patterns of the hold icon are set. To determine one pending icon change pattern.

  In E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the above E900, and the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the first change timing according to the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

  In E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is the icon that changes the display mode, the process proceeds to E520-8. If there is no icon that changes the display mode, the current icon display mode update process ends.

  In E520-8, the sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed from the plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon in the current fluctuation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected.

  The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in E520-9. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, a plurality of the icon change patterns based on the icon change mode and the selectivity (%) in the current fluctuation effect. One icon change pattern is determined from the patterns.

  In E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode updating process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 in the output control process of the above E900, and the first change is performed according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

  In the change pattern determination table for the reserved icon, the mode of the reserved icon change in the present fluctuation effect, the selection rate (%) of each reserved icon change pattern, and the type of the reserved icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other. For reference, a change effect generation timing and a change stage of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern are described.

  The change pattern of the hold icon includes a normal change pattern 01 in which, when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of change), the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect in response to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect, or an effect effect in which a character appears and acts on the icon with the character as a starting point is displayed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the mode changes, or a change notification symbol (special symbol) indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect is temporarily stopped, and acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. A symbol effect change pattern 01 in which the effect effect is performed and the display mode of the hold icon changes is set. There.

  The change effect generation timing of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the change effect is being executed (during change), and the effect design There is a time when 70a temporarily stops ((temporary) stop).

  The change stage of the hold icon includes 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) for changing the jackpot winning expectation to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) that changes the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher is set.

  In addition, the change effect generation timing of the hold icon is the above three timings, but is not limited to these timings, and another timing may be provided. For example, during the execution of the fluctuation effect until the reach is established (during the fluctuation), during the execution of the normal reach, during the execution of the SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
18 and 19 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon. FIG. 18 shows a case where the display mode of the icon is changed by one step. FIG. 19 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two stages.

  In the change pattern determination table for the icon, the mode of the icon change in the current fluctuation effect, the selectivity (%) of each of the icon change patterns, and the type of the selected icon change pattern are associated with each other. For reference, the change effect generation timing and the change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

  The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change pattern in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 in which the appearance of a character and an effect effect acting on the icon starting from the character are performed to change the display mode of the icon are set.

  The change effect generation timing of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the change effect is being executed (during change), and the effect design is performed. There is a time when 70a temporarily stops ((temporary) stop).

  The icon change stages include a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon) that changes the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher is set.

  In addition, in the change pattern determination table for the icon in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selectable. For example, in a variable effect in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped before the pseudo fluctuation is performed.

  Pseudo continuous production is a process in which a variation display of a production symbol is performed as if a plurality of renderings were performed in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball entry) to one starting opening (first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47). In order to make it appear as if it were done, all the effects are produced within the special figure fluctuation time determined for the winning (ball entry) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). This is a specially-designed effect symbol variation display in which re-variation display in which the symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and variation is restarted is performed once or more than once.

  Note that the change effect generation timing of the icon is the two timings described above, but is not limited to these timings, and another timing may be provided. For example, during the execution of the fluctuation effect until the reach is established (during the fluctuation), during the execution of the normal reach, during the execution of the SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relationship of change effect occurrence frequency between change icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command. ing.

  Further, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to a blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is greater at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern predetermined command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. It is lower.

  In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command, the holding icon is displayed more frequently than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command. Can easily be changed to a blue character icon.

  On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is greater at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. Is getting higher.

  Further, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command. It is lower.

  In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the icon is held more than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. Can easily be changed to a red character icon. Note that the predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

  Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command means that the game ball wins in the starting port (the first starting port 45 and the second starting port 47) and the hold icon is displayed. And the normal change pattern 01 in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of the change. The change effects that occur at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command are the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

  Since the relationship of the change effect occurrence frequency between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command is the predetermined command. Change effect that changes to a red character icon that has a higher jackpot expectation than the frame update timing according to the reception of the game, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is high, so the player can pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game It is possible to do.

  In addition, the frequency of the change effect of changing to the blue character icon is higher at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the change pattern designation command, so In addition, although it is difficult to change to the red character icon with a high jackpot expectation degree, it is easy to change to the blue character icon, so that the player can pay attention to the subsequent fluctuating effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game It becomes possible.

(Relationship 1 between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating a relationship 1 of a change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is higher than that of the icon change effect.

  Further, when a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

  Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing with the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is easy to change in the early stage of the change effect, so The player's expectation of the jackpot game can be pulled over a long period of time, and the interest of the game can be improved. The predetermined command is a start port winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating a relationship 2 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

  When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

  Further, when a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

  Since the relationship between the change effect occurrence frequency and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the icon is easy to change at a later time of the change effect, It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the player to the jackpot game until the late stage of the fluctuation effect.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 20D is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

  When a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, a first generation notification sound is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated, and when a blue character icon is generated as the hold icon and the corresponding icon (changes to), an icon is generated. The second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of (change), and when the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to), the icon generation (change) is performed. The third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound, and when the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. It is set as follows.

  In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of a plurality of icon display modes (four types). However, the notification sound when a CD icon is generated, a blue character icon, and a red character icon And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. The notification sound is not output when a CD icon is generated, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to any one of the modes. You may do so. Also, as for the rainbow icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types may be provided by providing a dedicated change notification sound.

(Main processing of the general control unit 141)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. Note that Ti (i = 1, 2,...) Indicates a step.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the centralized CPU 142, and the centralized CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

  First, the overall CPU 142 sets an interrupt prohibition for prohibiting a timer interrupt at T1, and performs an initialization process at T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, and at the same time, flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

  At T3, the overall CPU 142 sets an interruption permission for permitting a timer interrupt, and at T4, determines whether or not an effect instruction command has been received from the effect control unit 130m with reference to the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to T7, and if it has been received, at T5, an animation pattern setting for determining and setting an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received production designation command. Perform processing.

  The effect instruction commands include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, an ending effect pattern command, and the like.

  The animation group includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, scenes (timing) and weight frames (display time) for displaying the effect image, target data (sprite image identification numbers, transfer source addresses, etc.), By bundling one or more animation patterns, which are information that defines (specifies) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and information specifying an image display device for displaying an effect image. It is a formed group.

  The types of animation groups include, for example, effect symbol groups for displaying animation of effect symbol 70a, icon groups for displaying an animation of the reserved icon and the icon, and animation of variable effect such as background and character. Fluctuating effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect, and the like.

  In T6, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound setting process of determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device (new). It is determined whether there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is a frame update timing. If there is no frame switching flag, the process proceeds to T4, and if there is a frame switching flag, Clears the frame switching flag at T8.

  At T9, the centralized CPU 142 performs a display list generation / output process of generating a display list composed of a group of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

  Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and is one unit or a plurality of units. The display list is generated for each frame (frame update timing). In the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

  Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control processing described later, a drawing control command according to the contents of the animation scene information is set for each animation pattern already set. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the lowest priority animation group to the animation pattern of the highest priority animation group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , But vice versa.

  At T10, the overall CPU 142 performs a drawing command process for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing the drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and displays the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer on the first image display device. A process for displaying the image on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

  At T11, the centralized CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and generates and outputs a sound list for outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148.

  Here, the sound list is sound output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as sound data and music data to be output from the sound output device 9, and is used when a new sound is output. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

  At T12, the overall CPU 142 performs a sound output command process to instruct the sound control unit 148 to output a sound based on the sound list output. By performing the sound output command processing, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

  Therefore, the output of the various sounds is started from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 ends.

  The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing, but the output of various sounds is output from the audio output device 9 so as not to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. May be stopped, and vice versa.

  In T13, the general CPU 142 performs an animation control process of updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list of the next frame, and then shifts the process to T4. Thereafter, the processing from T4 to T13 is repeatedly performed in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the general control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. The command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  At T20, the central CPU 142 performs a command receiving process of receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m. Specifically, processing for storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the overall RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt processing ends.

(V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms).

  At T30, the overall CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating a predetermined number of various counters (scene switching counter, weight frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”). At T31, the image control unit 145 (VDP) Performs a frame buffer switching instruction process for instructing the VRAM 147 to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area.

  Thus, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer”. And alternately.

  At T32, the supervisor CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since the frame switching flag is referred to in T7, the processes in T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Time chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed) with a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

  The timing T1 is the 280th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn on the second frame buffer is transferred to the image display device. The display is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting port 45, a starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Does not start.

  At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal fluctuation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T6 is the 284th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen e (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T7 is the 296th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays a normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T8 is the 297th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Drawing of image data i (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and image display of image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T9 is the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound are started in a state where the frame update timing is shifted, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be reduced. It can be improved.

  Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound has been started (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound have been started. Is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the game, the output of the second generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

(Example of a change effect at the time of winning)
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in a case where the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) with a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold storage is stored, the normal fluctuation for variably displaying the effect symbol 70a. Direction is being performed.

  Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, and the icon change effect determination processing is executed, and as a change scenario, It is assumed that “scenario 02” (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed with a blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45, the first display icon 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B displays the first hold icon (blue character). Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70c. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been deleted is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (e), the effect symbol 70a of “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in the central variable display area. A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display ends, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  Although not shown, the sound output device 9 outputs BGM, sound effects, and the like during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to FIG. 29, FIG. 32, FIG. 33, FIG. 36, and FIG.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
FIGS. 27 and 28 are timing charts showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode updating process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon. is there.

  The timing of T1 is the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display image a is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, a fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is determined that the normal change pattern 01 for changing the first hold icon into the blue character icon is executed, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second output from the audio output device 9 is performed. Notification sound output is not started.

  At the timing of T3, drawing of the image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (the timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal fluctuation effect display screen e, and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays a normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the sound output device 9 continues to output the second notification sound. .

  The timing of T8 is the 16th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various Drawing of a pattern image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen h (blue) is displayed on the image display device. Character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T9 is the 17th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, fluctuation effect image, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

  As described above, the output of the second generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound are started in a state where the frame update timing is shifted, the player can be less likely to feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be reduced. It can be improved.

  Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound has been started (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the blue character icon is displayed, the deletion of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound have been started. Is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of the game, the output of the second generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of deleting the blue character icon, and the interest of the game can be improved. Becomes

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a case where the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to a blue character icon at the start of a change (at the time of a shift) (normal change pattern 01).

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, a loss occurs. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 29B, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. Shift display is performed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1.

  Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon and displayed. Further, the icon is changed from the CD icon to the blue character icon, and the second output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been deleted is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 29D, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), while the effect symbol 70a of “2” is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, it is displayed in the central variable display area. A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), when the effect symbol 70a of “3” is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, the reach effect ends and the variable display ends. Here, since the variable display ends, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 30 and 31 are timing charts showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. is there.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the fluctuation effect (the timing at which the fluctuation effect is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m decides to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but no character or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the sound is not displayed. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is not started.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

  The timing of T3 is the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generated notification sound. Is continued.

  The timing of T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) on the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn on the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generated notification sound. Is continued.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, character images, etc.) on the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn on the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the sound output device 9 does not output the third generated notification sound. Is continued.

  The timing of T6 is the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device. However, the non-output of the third generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. You.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal fluctuating effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the sound output device 9 starts outputting the third generation notification sound. . The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The timing of T8 is the 106th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is continued, and the image data j (the background image, various fluctuation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is output. The drawing is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Becomes

  The timing of T9 is the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various Drawing of a symbol image, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuation effect display screen j (red Character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal fluctuating effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

  In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared to a case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, the player can be less likely to feel discomfort, and the interest of the game can be reduced. It can be improved.

  In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound has been started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the output is stopped at a different frame update timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing at which the red character icon is deleted, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Example of the effect change pattern 01)
FIGS. 32 and 33 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in a case where the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon during the variable effect (character effect change pattern 01).

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in a state where the first holding icon and the second holding icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no holding storage is stored, the effect symbol 70a is normally displayed in a variable manner. A fluctuating effect is being performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (b)), the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation and points the heart H at the icon (CD icon) TH. There is a directing effect.

  Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 32D, the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), the effect symbol 70a of “2” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in the central variable display area. A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, when SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 33B, an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Incidentally, when the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, thereby suggesting that it is a jackpot, and a combination indicating that the stably displayed effect symbol 70a is a jackpot. Then, the display is stopped at "222").

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33D, the effect symbol 70a returns to the original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Example of design effect change pattern 01)
FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the reserved icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first reserved icon is changed to the red character icon. It is.

  The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable effect (the timing at which the variable effect is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal variable period in which the normal variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is performed. is there. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a of the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal fluctuation effect display screen a is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the 299th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it is determined that the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon is executed, but no change symbol or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 is not displayed. Does not start outputting the third generation notification sound.

  At the timing of T2, drawing of the image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) on the second buffer frame is started, and is rendered on the first frame buffer. The display of the displayed image data c on the image display device is started, and the image display device is brought into a state in which the normal fluctuation effect display screen c is displayed.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. No output is started.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output is continued.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame from the start of the fluctuation effect, and is a frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output is continued.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. Drawing of image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data g of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 continues. Is done.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol display and red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. The output of the notification sound is started. The timing of T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The timing of T8 is the 345th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data j (background image, various stop effect images, various design images, various icon images, changing design images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and has been drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data i on the image display device is started, and a temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Output of sound is continued.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame from the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, various stop effect images, various Drawing of a symbol image, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and temporary stop effect display is displayed on the image display device. The screen j (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, various variation effect images, various design images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is brought into a state in which the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol and red character icon display) is displayed.

  In this manner, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Therefore, compared to a case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, the player can be less likely to feel discomfort, and the interest of the game can be reduced. It can be improved.

  In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound has been started in synchronization with the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the generation of the third generation notification sound have been started. Since the output is stopped at a different frame update timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing at which the red character icon is deleted, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Example of design effect change pattern 01)
FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect in a case where the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a red character icon while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (during temporary stop) (symbol action change pattern 01).

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the state in which the first holding icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B, the normal variation in which the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed. Direction is being performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36B, the effect symbol 70a of “2” is displayed in the left variable display area, “3” is displayed in the right variable display area, and “change” is displayed in the center variable display area is stopped (temporarily). While stopping), an effect such as lightning appears from the changed pattern stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the center fluctuation display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 and hits. The display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in the central variable display area. A reach effect for varyingly displaying the effect symbol 70a is executed.

  Then, when SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 37B, an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, when it develops to SP reach, the effect design 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, thereby suggesting a jackpot, and indicating that the effect symbol 70a, which has been variably displayed, is a jackpot ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37D, the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command (start-up opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), There is a case where the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, so that the variation of the change effect is increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting opening winning designation command, but is not limited to such a method. . For example, at a timing when the display mode of the icon (the icon or the holding icon) can be changed, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start-up winning award designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how the final display mode is changed depends on the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon or the hold icon) can be changed. May be determined each time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are four types of display modes of the icons (the icons and the hold icons): a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. However, the number is not limited to four, and may be more or less.

  For example, a special icon (flashing CD icon) may be provided that has a lower jackpot winning expectation than the blue character icon and suggests that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (the predetermined change after receiving the change pattern designation command). (A change effect that occurs at the frame update timing), it does not change to a special icon, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and to enhance the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation degree of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is determined in the order of (CD icon) <flashing CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon. What is necessary is just to make it high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed in the character effect change pattern 01 or the symbol effect change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be provided a case where the character C1 and the changing symbol are not changed even if they are displayed (a so-called gassing effect). In the case where such a gaseous effect is provided, the gaseous effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) is better. The execution rate is higher than the change effect at the time of a prize and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command), or the symbol effect change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern designation command) It is desirable to be able to execute only the gas effect for the change effect that occurs at the predetermined frame update timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one fluctuation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the prize change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, and therefore, the normal change pattern 02 The character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effects generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the reserved icon) may be changed a plurality of times in one fluctuation effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (start-up opening winning command or The frame update timing is two frames after the number of frames that received the variation pattern designation command). However, the frame update timing is not limited to two frames. One frame or several frames after a predetermined command is received unless it is extremely late. Good.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 01” is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the change pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this timing. The change effect may be executed at a frame update timing according to the reception of the symbol storage designation command or the effect symbol designation command.

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal change pattern 02”, the “character effect change pattern 01”, and the “symbol effect change pattern 01” are executed, the change effect is performed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this timing, and a change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect to notify that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an effect. In addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, the reserved The lamp may emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon). In this case, similarly to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon or the reserved icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is displayed. At the same time (synchronously), the light emission of the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started, and the timing of terminating the light emission of the lamps may end after a predetermined time has elapsed. Alternatively, the processing may be ended (in synchronization) with the frame update timing for deleting the icon (the icon or the reserved icon).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted by the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted by the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed, but the normal change The pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing in this way, the first specific game state and the second specific game state have a short fluctuation time, so that the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change executed during the change. By limiting the execution of the pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command), the game of the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be performed without impairing the playability. It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon or the icon itself. However, the present invention is not limited to such a change, and the display of the hold icon or the icon itself may be performed. Without changing the mode (as the CD icon), a reserve icon or an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the icon, or the periphery of the reserve icon or the icon (near) A character indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed, or a character icon (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) indicating a scheduled effect to be executed around (near) the holding icon or the icon. May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, the determination is made irrespective of the jackpot hit, but may be determined with reference to the jackpot hit. More specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of scenarios based on the icon final display mode, the current number of suspensions, the jackpot hit, and the selection rate (%).

As described above, when the change scenario is determined with reference to the jackpot hit, when the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, the current hold number is set to “1” or “2” rather than “1” or “2”. In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that a change scenario that changes to a red character icon when winning is easily selected.
In other words, if the jackpot has been won and it changes to a red character icon, the current redemption number is "1" or "2" rather than "3" or "4" when a red character is won at the time of winning. It can also be said that the selection rate (%) is such that a change scenario that changes to an icon is difficult to select.
In addition, if the player does not win the jackpot, that is, if the player loses and changes to the red character icon, the change scenario changes to the red character icon at the time of winning, rather than to the case of winning the jackpot and changes to the red character icon. May be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, the determination is made regardless of the current number of hold and the hit of the jackpot, but the determination is made with reference to the current number of hold and the hit of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one of the plurality of holding icon change patterns is selected from the plurality of holding icon change patterns based on the mode of the change of the hold icon in the present fluctuation effect, the current number of holds, the hit of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). What is necessary is just to determine a change pattern.

As described above, when the hold icon change pattern is determined with reference to the current number of holds and the jackpot hit, if the jackpot has been won and the icon changes to a red character icon, the current hold number is “1” or “ The selection rate (%) may be set such that “Normal change pattern 01” is easier to select as the reserved icon change pattern in “3” or “4” than in “2”.
In other words, when the jackpot is won and the character changes to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is larger when the current hold number is “1” or “2” than when the current hold number is “3” or “4”. It can be said that the selection rate (%) is such that “normal change pattern 01” is difficult to select.
In addition, when the jackpot has not been won, that is, when the player loses and changes to the red character icon, the “normal change pattern 01” is used as the pending icon change pattern, compared to the case where the jackpot has been won and the red character icon changes. May be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

  As described above, in the case of the winning effect change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command), when the red character icon changes, the current number of hold is “1” or At the time of "3" or "4", the jackpot winning expectation is higher than at the time of "2", so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(2nd Embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

  In the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 39A, a special symbol TZ variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol is displayed at the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying is provided.

  Further, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved numeral indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), The second embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved numeral indicating the number of two special symbols reserved (U2) is provided.

  Note that the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F correspond to the first reserved information, and are displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B. The displayed first hold icon and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to the execution information.

(Specific example when the variable production starts from the customer waiting state)
With reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, a specific example at the time when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described. FIG. 38 is a timing chart at which the variable effect starts from the customer waiting state. FIGS. 39 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 40 (g) to (k) show (a) to (k) in FIG. It is a figure showing the production example corresponding to.

  First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame from the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39A, the first image display device 70 is in a state where the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

  The timing of T1 is a timing at which the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first reserved numeral and the non-animated increase display of the first reserved icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is output. Is started.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved numeral displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 in the normal size. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs a first generated notification sound (picot).

  The timing of T2 is a timing at which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is reduced from "1" to "0" and a variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) is started by the normal variable pattern (start of a customer waiting state). From the fifth frame). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the decrease display of the first reserved numeral by non-animation, and the change display (decrease display) of the first reserved icon by animation to the icon are started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “0”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the reduced design in which the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

  The timing of T3 is a timing that is the tenth frame from the start of the output of the first generation notification sound (the fourteenth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

  The timing of T4 is the timing when the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon starts is the 20th frame (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the change display of the first hold icon ends.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

  The timing of T5 is a timing that is the 40th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is performed. Scroll (downward movement) of effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

  The timing of T6 is a timing that is the 50th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect design 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is performed. The scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the region is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in all the variable display regions.

  The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “3” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the variable display area on the left side, and The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the center and right variable display areas.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “5” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the variable display area on the right side, and The scrolling of the effect design 70a continues in the central variable display area.

  The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “6” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and a loss occurs. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating the presence is displayed.

  The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame from the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left-center-right variation display region is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is effected. Stop display is performed in the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from “0” to “1”) during the waiting state for the customer, the number of reserved symbols and the icon of the reserved icon by non-animation are minimized for one frame. Since the processing ends in the period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to the variable effect (reduced display of the reserved number and change display of the reserved icon) so as not to be delayed.

  In addition, the generation notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold digits and the hold icon is continued until the (frame update) timing after the end of the increase display of the hold numbers and the hold icon (frame update). Make sure players know that the number of special symbol holds has increased to continue

  In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations decreases (changes from “1” to “0”), a decrease display of non-animation of the reserved numbers and a change display of the reserved icons by animation to the icons are executed. It is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the scrolling of the effect design (the next effect) is performed at the timing when the display of the reserved numbers is completed (the frame is updated), rather than when the change display of the reserved icon to the icon is completed (the frame is updated). (Update to a symbol) is started, so that it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the game in which the variable effect is started after the number of held memories is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the effect design is displayed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (update to the next effect design) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the holding memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  When the number of special symbol reservations increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed in a non-animation manner, but rather than the increase display of the hold figures. It may be executed by animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Also, instead of starting the reduced display of the reserved digits and the change display of the reserved icon to the icon (reduced display) at the same (frame update) timing, the display of the reduced reserved digits is completed (frame update). If it is earlier, either may be started first. By doing so, the decrease in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Also, at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) is not started (start is delayed than usual), but the change display of the hold icon is changed. Scrolling of the effect design (update to the next effect design) may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before completion.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a floating production)
With reference to FIGS. 41 to 42, a description will be given of a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the fluctuation effect. FIG. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of suspensions increases during a variable effect, and FIGS. 42 (a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing that is the 50th frame from the start of the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern. At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is a timing at which the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold number by non-animation and the increase display of the first hold icon by animation are started, and the output of the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “0” to “1”. At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1 in a very small size, and the enlarged display is started. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs a first generated notification sound (picot).

  The timing of T3 is the 10th frame from the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends with the end of the increase display of the first hold icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the first image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

  As described above, when the number of special symbol reservations increases, an increase display by non-animation of the reserved numbers and an increase display by animation of the reservation icon are executed, so that the player is notified that the number of special symbol reservations has increased. Can be surely recognized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the number of special symbols to be held changes because the time when the increase display of the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols reserved has increased due to the reserved figures, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the reservation icon is performed over a longer period of time than when the special symbol reservation number increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the generation notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), the special symbol hold number is reduced. The increase can be effectively produced, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the reserved icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the change display of the reserved icon to the icon, the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, if the increase display of the reserved digits and the increase display of the reserve icon are not started at the same (frame update) timing, but the timing at which the increase display of the reserved digits is completed (frame update) is earlier, May be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols at an early stage while improving the degree of freedom of display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, instead of shortening the period relating to the increased display of the reserved icons, rather than shortening the period relating to the change display of the reserved icons to the icons, the period relating to the increased display of the reserved icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, instead of shortening the period relating to the increase display of the suspension icons, rather than shortening the period relating to the change display of the suspension icon to the icon, both periods may be set to the same length.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases immediately after decrease)
With reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, a specific example in which the number of holds increases immediately after the decrease will be described. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of suspensions increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 44 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. 43 (a) to (f).

  First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44A, the first image display device 70 is in a state in which the effect symbols 70 a of “4”, “6”, and “8” indicating the loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ing. Also, “2” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and a first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

  The timing of T1 is a timing at which a variation effect (variable display of a special symbol) according to the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduced display of the first reserved number by non-animation, the change display of the first reserved icon by animation to the icon, and the reduced display of the first reserved icon by animation are performed. Be started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “2” to “1”. . Also, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is displayed. The 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced design in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

  The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display by the non-animation of the first hold number is started. Since the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon are being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon and the notification at the time of the icon occurrence are performed. The output of the generated notification sound, which is a sound, is on standby.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is continued.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first hold icon end. In addition, the increased display of the waiting first standby icon by animation is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2 in a very small size, the enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. You.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44E, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the tenth frame from the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends with the end of the increase display of the first hold icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the first image is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

  As described above, when the number of special symbol reservations increases during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the change display and the decrease display are completed (frame update). Even before the timing, the display of the increase of the reserved number is started, so that the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during the execution of the change display and the decrease display of the reserve icon. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the number of special symbols held increases during execution of the change display of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted). When the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound are started, so that it becomes difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol holds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Is also good.

  Also, at the timing when the change display and the decrease display of the hold icon are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound are not started (the start of the hold icon is delayed than usual). The display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display and the decrease display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the transition of the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, even when the number of special symbols held increases while the hold icon is being increased, the display of the increase of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited (restricted) as in the case of the change display or the decrease display of the hold icon. On the other hand, the increase display of the hold number may be started, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started at the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during specific reach production)
With reference to FIGS. 45 and 46, a specific example when the number of holdings increases during the specific reach effect will be described. FIG. 45 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 46 (a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG. .

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing at which the 400th frame has elapsed since the start of the variation effect using the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70 a of “7” is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, respectively, and the effect symbol 70 a is displayed in the central variable display area. Is continuously displayed. In addition, “1” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a development effect for developing into an SP reach effect is started.

  Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “7” temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display regions and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display region are shifted to the upper left of the screen. Starts moving and reduced display.

  The timing of T3 is a timing that is the fifteenth frame from the start of the development effect (the 445th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect is continuing.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right fluctuation display areas and the scroll in the center fluctuation display area are performed. The effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame from the start of the development effect (the 46th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect ends, and the SP reach effect starts.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a of the variable display area in the middle left and right is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and in the center of the screen. A confrontation effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, a hold icon (here, a hold icon) displayed in a hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). Only the first holding icon) is hidden together with the holding icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

  The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, an increase display of the first hold number by non-animation is started. However, since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing and the time when the icon is generated are displayed. The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved numeral “1” displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes to “2” and , The final effect of the confrontation effect (determined effect for notifying whether or not a jackpot is performed) is being executed.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame from the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (fixed effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen. Is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in a combination (“777”) indicating that the is a big hit.

  The timing of T7 is the timing when the SP reach effect (competition effect) starts, which is the 450th frame (the 910th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display by the non-animation of the first hold icon are performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect design 70a, which has been reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a state of swinging). become). Also, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed again on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display unit 70B2.

  Finally, the effect symbol 70a, which has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right fluctuation display area, is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination "777" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  As described above, when the number of special symbols to be held increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even if the number of the reserved figures is earlier than the timing at which the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the number of special symbols held increases during execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is on standby (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). At the timing when the loss effect design or the jackpot effect design is enlarged display) (frame update), the increase display of the reserve icon is started, so that it is possible to prevent the transition of the number of special design reserves from becoming difficult to grasp and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to do.

  In addition, when the increase display of the reserve icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase of the reserve icon by non-animation that is completed in one frame is performed, so that the number of special symbol reservations is increased. Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing and the timing of executing the increased display of the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling of the player and improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends by the occurrence notification sound. It is difficult to misunderstand that it has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the increase of the reserved number is performed while the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). In addition, it is preferable that the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) is executed collectively in one frame.

  In addition, when the special symbol reservation number increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is not output, and the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the held digits. Good.

  In addition, the SP reach effect has been exemplified as the specific effect, but the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full-rotation reach effect may be included.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, a description will be given of a specific example in which the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 47 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. FIGS. 48 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 49 (g) to (i) show (a) to (i) of FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect corresponding to i).

  First, the timing of T1 is a timing when the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state is started and the 400th frame is reached. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48A, “1” is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and “4” is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the first reserved icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second reserved icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display part 70D1 to the fourth display part 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively. And the icon TH is displayed. Further, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, “0 remaining”) is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is directed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

  The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold numeral by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B has been deleted, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound at the time of the icon occurrence. The output of the generated notification sound is not performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from “1” to “2”. At the same time, the scroll of the effect symbol 70a continues.

  The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed in the variably displayed area in the middle left is temporarily stopped simultaneously.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of “285” is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left-to-right middle variable display area, The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating the loss is displayed.

  The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a (the 445th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display indicating the result of the game during the predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG darkens, and the “special time end” indicating the end of the specific game state and during the predetermined advantageous period The number of executed big hit games "big hit x1" is displayed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen.

  The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame from the start of the result display (the 460th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters “TOTAL 1200pt” indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid) during the predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is displayed additionally.

  The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame from the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the variation display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. It is stopped and displayed in the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable effect) at which the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state ends and the first variable effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the reduced display of the second reserved number by non-animation, the change display of the second reserved icon by animation to the icon, the reduced display of the second reserved icon by animation, The non-animation return display of the first hold icon and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from “4” to “3”. At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed on the screen start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display unit.

  Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in a return manner, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced design in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol) is started, and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. On the upper left of the screen, a left-hit image HU for urging the player to fire game balls toward the left area of the game area 5a is displayed.

  The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon (the 510th frame from the start of the previous fluctuation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon end.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 that has moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the second holding icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display units 70D2 to 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a stops.

  The timing of T9 is a timing that is the tenth frame after the change display and the decrease display of the second hold icon are completed (the 520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuation effect). At this timing, the scroll of the effect symbol 70a (moving downward) continues.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display region on the left, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display region is scrolled. Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

  As described above, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is started while the increase display of the first hold icon is started. Therefore, even when the specific effect is being executed, the player can be made aware that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the first hold icon is increased and displayed at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect in) is completed (frame update). In order to start the game, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reservations has increased even if the display of the increase in the number of the first reservation numbers executed earlier is missed, and to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed, a special symbol hold is performed to perform the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number is increased and the timing when the increased display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity of the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is generated at the timing when the specific game state ends by the generation notification sound. It is difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, until the change display of the hold icon to the icon is completed, the effect design does not scroll (not updated to the next effect design), and the effect design is displayed at the timing when the change display of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Is started (update to the next effect symbol), it is easy to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, even when the number of the first special symbol reservations increases by a plurality of times during the specific game state, while the display of the increase of the reserved numbers is executed, the execution of the display of the increase of the reserved icon is on standby (restricted). The increase display of the reserve icon corresponding to the increase at the timing when the specific game state (the last fluctuation effect in) is completed (frame update) may be collectively executed in one frame.

  In addition, when the number of the first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reserved digits instead of outputting the generation notification sound.

  In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

  In the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is being performed during the fluctuation effect. However, the icon may not be displayed without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. May be hidden.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but are set on the second image display device 71 ( Display), or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, or the like) different from the image display device. When the LED is set to a dedicated LED, the number of special symbols to be reserved may be displayed according to the lighting color of the LED or the lighting / flashing mode.

(Contents of the invention described in the first embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, when a start condition is satisfied, determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is obtained, and the determination information is stored. When the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variation effect is executed according to the result of the determination, and a special game is executed when the variation effect has a special result. Some of such gaming machines display a hold image corresponding to undetermined determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image to a reserved image in a display mode that indicates that the variable effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine in order to enhance the interest of the game.

  As a first configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and a command from the main control means are provided. The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player. A determination unit (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, and a holding unit (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination. The slave control unit stores a holding image (holding icon) corresponding to the held right. The image display means (display / sound control unit 140) for displaying on the display means (first image display device 70) and the presentation means (sound output device 9) in the course of the game are given a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change Effect performing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a notification sound), wherein the image display means updates an image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is transmitted from the main control unit. A first change effect (a change effect at the time of a prize) executed at a frame update timing in response to the reception of the transmitted command (starting port prize designation command) indicating that the right has occurred, and a command transmitted from the main control means. A second change effect (normal change pattern) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command indicating the result of the determination (change pattern designation command) 2, the character effect change pattern 01 and the symbol effect change pattern 01), wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and the first effect change is performed. The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing to end. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second configuration for solving the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and a command from the main control unit are provided. The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player. A determining means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and a variation control means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the determination and then stopping and displaying the symbols. , And the slave control means includes an image display means (display / voice control unit) for displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the held right on the display means (first image display device 70). 40), and effect execution means (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game, The image display unit is configured to update an image to be displayed on the display unit every time a predetermined frame update timing comes, and a special reserved image indicating a possibility of performing the special game from the reserved image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the symbol into a command (a change pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit and indicating that the symbol change display is to be started. A first change effect (normal change pattern 01) to be executed at a frame update timing according to the reception, and a command indicating a result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. (A normal pattern 02, a character effect change pattern 01, and a symbol effect change pattern 01) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the (fluctuation pattern designation command). The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a third configuration for solving the above-described problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game and a command from the main control means are provided. The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player. Determining means (main CPU 110a), holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and fluctuation control means (variable display of the symbols based on the result of the determination and then stop display of the symbols) A main CPU 110a), and the slave control means includes a pre-judgment suspension image (suspension icon) corresponding to the suspended right, and a post-determination image for the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the post-judgment pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right on the display means (first image display device 70); An effect execution unit (display / voice control unit 140) for causing the output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display unit has a predetermined frame update timing. An image to be displayed on the display means is updated every time, and the pre-judgment special holding image or the post-judgment indicating the possibility of performing the special game from the pre-judgment holding image or the judging holding image It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing to a special hold image, and the change effect is a frame transmitted from the main control means when the change display of the symbol starts. Of the first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing according to the command (change pattern specification command) and the command (change pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control means and indicating the result of the determination. A second change effect (a normal change pattern 02, a character effect change pattern 01, and a symbol effect change pattern 01) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after reception, and the effect execution means includes: The notification effect is started at a frame update timing at which the change effect is started, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the special reserved image before determination. In the case where the image is changed to the special reserved image after the determination, the second change The effect is to be performed at a high rate. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a command from the main control unit The main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player. A determination unit (main CPU 110a), and a reservation unit (main RAM 110c) capable of retaining a predetermined number of rights for the determination. ) On the display means (first image display device 70) and a predetermined notification effect (icon generation) on the effect means (audio output device 9) in the course of the game. Effect (display / voice control unit 140) for executing the change / notification sound), wherein the image display means updates an image displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing comes. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is held A first change effect executed at a frame update timing according to a command (start-up winning award designation command, variation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the right changes. (Change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and a command (change pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit and indicating the result of the determination. And a second change effect (normal change pattern 01, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after the reception of the special command. The mode has a first display mode (blue character icon) and a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to perform the special game than the first display mode. Starting the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, starting the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and updating the frame at which the first change effect ends The notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the timing, and the second change effect is executed more than when the first change effect is executed. It is easier to change to the second display mode when performed, and when changing to the second display mode in the first change effect, the number of pending rights is equal to the first number. When the second number is larger than the first number, the possibility that the special game is performed is higher. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The “special hold image” and “pre-judgment special hold image” refer to a change in shape, a change in color from the normal hold icon, a change in color, and a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation around the hold icon. An effect display, a character showing a jackpot expectation degree around (near) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, “SP”) suggesting an effect to be executed around (around) the hold icon And “pseudo-reams”).

  In addition, the `` special holding image after determination '' is an image in which the shape has been changed from the normal icon, an image in which the color has been changed, an effect in which a color effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed around the icon, A character that indicates the jackpot winning expectation is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image (for example, “SP” or “pseudo-ren”) that indicates an effect to be executed around (near) the icon. ) Is included.

The “first display mode” includes a special icon (flashing CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
The “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

  The “hold image after determination” and the “special hold image after determination” are displayed from the start to the end of the variable effect, are displayed for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the performance includes the display being erased.

(Contents of the invention described in the second embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored as a hold memory, and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information. Generally, a variable effect is executed on the basis of this. In such a gaming machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold storage, or by displaying an execution image corresponding to the hold storage in which the variable effect has been executed, This allows the player to grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, JP-A-2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending storage when the number of pending storage changes.

  As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (effect for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means) Control board 130), the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition conditions (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port) Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; and storage means capable of storing the determination information, for which the determination has not been performed, as on-hold storage; A control unit configured to execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display unit (image display device); a variable effect execution unit; first hold information (hold number) indicating a number of the hold storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating a different child, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached. The information display means is capable of executing a decrease display of the first suspension information and a decrease display of the second suspension information when the number of the suspension storages decreases, and the decrease display of the second suspension information ( Completion of the reduced display of the first hold information (update to the hold number obtained by subtracting 1) from the frame update timing at which completion of the move to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area is completed. , The frame update timing is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (effect for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means) Control board 130), the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition conditions (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port) Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; and storage means capable of storing the determination information, for which the determination has not been performed, as on-hold storage; A control unit configured to execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display unit (image display device); a variable effect execution unit; first hold information (hold number) indicating a number of the hold storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating a different child, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached. The information display means, when the number of the holding storages decreases, displays a decrease in the first holding information, and a change display that changes the second holding information in which the variable effect has been started to execution information (the icon). Can be executed, and the change of the second suspension information to the execution information (movement from the suspension icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed more than the frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of one hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by one) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (effect for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means) Control board 130), the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition conditions (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port) Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; and storage means capable of storing the determination information, for which the determination has not been performed, as on-hold storage; A control unit configured to execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display unit (image display device); a variable effect execution unit; first hold information (hold number) indicating a number of the hold storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating a different child, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached. The information display means can execute a decrease display of the first suspension information and a decrease display of the second suspension information when the number of the suspension memories decreases, and when the number of the suspension memories increases, An increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and when the number of the hold storages increases during the decrease display of the second hold information, the second hold information is displayed. Before the frame update timing at which the decrease display (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed, the increase display of the first hold information (the hold number added by 1). Update to It is adapted to be started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control unit (controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control unit) Effect control board 130), the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port). A determination unit that can determine whether to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player, and a storage unit that can store the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device); first holding information (hold number) indicating the number of the holding storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached, The information display means includes: a decrease display of the first suspension information when the number of the suspension storages decreases; and a change display for changing the second suspension information for which the variable display has been started to execution information (the icon). Can be executed, and when the number of the hold information increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed, and during the change display of the second hold information, When the number of the reserved storages increases, before the frame update timing at which the reduced display (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) of the second reserved information is completed. What also increase the display of the first suspension information (1 changes to the added pending digits) is adapted to be started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (effect for controlling the production of the game based on a command from the main control means) Control board 130), the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition conditions (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port) Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; and storage means capable of storing the determination information, for which the determination has not been performed, as on-hold storage; A control unit configured to execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display unit (image display device); a variable effect execution unit; first hold information (hold number) indicating a number of the hold storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating a different child, wherein the image display means updates the display image every time a predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms) is reached. The information display means is capable of executing an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases; If the number of storages increases, the first update information (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) of the second hold information is completed more than the first frame update timing than the frame update timing. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the hold information (update to the hold number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a sub-control means (effect for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control means) Control board 130), the main control means, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition conditions (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port) Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player; and storage means capable of storing the determination information, for which the determination has not been performed, as on-hold storage; A control unit configured to execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display unit (image display device); a variable effect execution unit; first hold information (hold number) indicating a number of the hold storage; Corresponding to each of the pending memories Information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating a separate child, and the variable effect execution means includes a specific effect that expects the execution of the special game during the execution of the variable effect ( SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full-rotation reach effect) can be executed, and the information display means increases the first hold information and displays the second hold information when the number of the hold memories increases. When the number of the on-hold storage increases during the execution of the specific effect, an increase display of the first on-hold information (update to the on-hold number incremented by 1) is executed. The increase display of the second hold information is not executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the big hit effect symbol which has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

  As a seventh configuration for solving the above-described problem, a main control unit (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, a sub-control unit for controlling the effect of the game based on a command from the main control unit, In the gaming machine provided with the above, the main control means, based on the determination information (special map determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the starting port), a special advantageous to the player Determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a game (big hit game); storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as hold storage; a normal game state; Game state control means that can be controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, wherein the sub control means can execute a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device) Fluctuation effect executing means, and Information display means capable of displaying first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of hold storage, and second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storage; The display means can execute an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storages increases, and the storage means can execute the first acquisition condition ( The determination information based on the game ball entering the first starting port) is stored as a first hold memory, and the determination information based on the satisfaction of the second acquisition condition (ball entry of the game ball into the second starting port). Is stored as a second hold storage, and when the number of the first hold storages increases in the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is executed. A predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second hold information (special condition). The last change performance in the gaming state is the end, so as not run until you usually return to the game state). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

(Third embodiment)
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, the description of the same parts as in the first and second embodiments will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

  In the third embodiment, an emphasis effect that is executed to emphasize the main effect during the execution of the main effect that directs the progress of the game in the game effect will be described.

First, a description will be given of a fluctuation effect performed based on the fluctuation effect pattern.
FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are diagrams illustrating a variation effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. Specifically, FIG. 50 is a variable effect pattern determination table for a loss that is referred to when the result of the big hit determination of the special figure determination information is a loss, and FIG. 51 is a result of the big hit determination of the special figure determination information. It is a fluctuation effect pattern determination table for a big hit, which is referred to when the is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the fluctuation effect pattern determination table includes the current game state, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, and the selectivity (%) of each fluctuation effect pattern. And the determined variation effect patterns are associated with each other, and the effect configuration (type of game effect) of each variation effect pattern is described in the rightmost column for reference.

  The variable effect pattern is such that the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the effect button device 16, the selection button device 18, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the movable portion are displayed during the special symbol variable display. This is an effect mode of a variable effect performed using an effect device such as the effect device 73 or the board lighting device 74, and describes an effect configuration (effect mode) such as a content of a reach effect.

  For example, a case will be described in which a variable effect pattern is determined using the loss effect variable effect pattern determination table in FIG. 50. The current game state is a “non-time-saving game state (normal game state)” and the special figure change pattern When the designated command is “E4H, 05H”, the variation effect pattern 09 is determined at a rate of 40%, the variation effect pattern 10 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the variation effect pattern 11 is determined at a rate of 20%. The variation effect pattern 12 is determined at a rate of 10%.

Here, “normal fluctuation” indicates that a normal fluctuation effect in which a reach state does not occur by the effect symbol 70a is performed.
“Long fluctuation” indicates that a long fluctuation effect that is longer than the normal fluctuation effect and does not cause the reach state is performed.
“Shortened fluctuation” indicates that a shortened fluctuation effect that is shorter than the normal fluctuation effect and does not cause the reach state is performed.
“Ultra-shortened fluctuation” indicates that an ultra-shortened fluctuation effect that is shorter than the shortened fluctuation effect and does not generate a reach state is performed.

The “pseudo-fluctuating fluctuation” is a pseudo-continuous notice in which a temporary stop and a re-fluctuation (pseudo-continuous production) of the effect symbol 70a are performed one or more times during one fluctuation effect (variable display of a special symbol). This indicates that as a result of executing the swaying effect of whether or not the simulated swaying fluctuation effect is executed, which results in that the pseudo continuous notice is not executed.
"Pseudo 1" indicates that the first temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.
"Pseudo 2" indicates that the second temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.
“Pseudo 3” indicates that the third temporary stop and re-variation (pseudo continuous production) of the effect symbol 70a is executed as a pseudo continuous notice.

  The first characteristic of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is that if the reach effects to be executed are the same variable effect pattern, the pseudo continuous notice is more effective than the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous notice is not executed. The point is that the fluctuation effect pattern to be executed has a higher jackpot winning expectation degree. By doing so, the player's expectation of whether or not the pseudo continuous notice is executed can be excited, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The second characteristic of the variable effect pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 is that if the number of executions of the temporary stop and the re-variation (pseudo continuous effect) of the effect symbol 70a is the same, the effect is N (normal). It is pointed out that the fluctuation effect pattern sandwiching the N (normal) reach effect has a higher jackpot winning expectation than the fluctuation effect pattern not interposing the reach effect. It is possible to excite the player's sense of expectation at which timing the pseudo continuous production is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The third feature of the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is that a variation effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is not executed before the SPSP reach effect is a variation effect pattern in which the SPSP reach effect is finally performed. The fluctuation effect pattern in which the SP reach effect is executed before the SPSP reach effect has a higher jackpot winning expectation (the jackpot game is more easily executed) than the pattern. By doing so, the player's expectation of the progress of the reach effect can be excited, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Note that the above-described fluctuation effect pattern determination table merely lists characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment as an example. In the progress of the game, other fluctuation effect patterns (not shown) Many judgment tables are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various game effects are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. There are a customer waiting effect performed during execution, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a performed during the execution of the special symbol variable display, and a jackpot effect performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

  In the customer waiting effect, the fluctuation effect, and the jackpot effect, in the display area (display screen) including the central area of the display unit of the first image display device 70, various types of display patterns, characters, characters, and backgrounds are mainly used. The main effects of the display mode are performed, and by these main effects, a suggestion of the jackpot winning expectation degree, a suggestion of an effect mode corresponding to the current game state, a notification of whether or not the jackpot has been won, and the like are performed.

  When the main effect is performed on the display unit of the first image display device 70 in various game effects (a customer waiting effect, a fluctuation effect, a big hit effect, and the like), the emphasized effect is more peripheral than the display region of the main effect. In at least a part of the display area in the direction (for example, a display area near the right and left outer edges of the display unit), an effect effect that attracts and attracts a player is displayed to add a staging effect that appeals to the player's vision. To enhance the entertainment of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (2), the highlighting effects include a highlighting color maintaining effect and a repeated highlighting effect in which the display mode of the highlighting effect image is different from that of the highlighting color maintaining effect. Either the highlighting color effect or the repeated highlighting effect can be executed according to the display mode of the main effect.

  The highlight color maintenance effect is, for example, when an effect indicating the jackpot winning expectation degree such as a pseudo continuous notice, a reach effect, a pre-reading continuous notice, etc. is performed based on the variable effect pattern executed in the variable effect, these effects are performed. The highlighting is performed with an effect image of a predetermined color, shape and size in accordance with the content of the production mode of the main production performed in each of the above, and this highlighting is continued for a predetermined period in the display area near the outer edge of the display unit. Do it. With this highlight color maintaining effect, a visual effect can be added to the effect contents of the main effect.

  Further, in the highlight display color maintaining effect, a plurality of types of change display patterns (color, shape, and size change display patterns) are provided. For example, as a color change display pattern of an effect image, “blue” → “yellow” → A first change display pattern that changes to “green” and a second change display pattern that changes to “blue” → “green” → “red”, and when the first change display pattern is performed, a blue effect image After the display is maintained for a certain period, the color changes stepwise based on the change display pattern to be executed, such as changing to the display of the yellow effect image.

  On the other hand, the repetition emphasis production is, for example, various reporting productions such as a jackpot design stop display production, a result reporting production (a jackpot decision production, a promotion production, a resurrection production, etc.), a jackpot production, a mode reporting production, a zone reporting production, etc. Is performed, according to the content of the production mode of the main production performed in each of those productions, a strong glow is emitted in the display area in the outer edge direction than the display area of the main production, and the change display of the glow color is performed. Is emphasized with a flash image of a light emission mode in which the flashing is repeatedly performed. With this repeated emphasis effect, it is possible to add a visual effect that emphasizes the effect design display, character display, and character display of the main effect.

  In the repeated emphasis production, one change display pattern is provided that is associated with each type of production style of the main production to be executed, and this change display pattern includes, for example, two display colors (for example, “red” and “red”). The display in which “yellow” changes alternately is repeated, and the display color does not change stepwise.

Next, a highlight display color maintaining effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the pseudo continuous notice will be described.
As shown in FIG. 53, when the pseudo continuous notice is performed in the fluctuating effect, the highlight display color maintaining effect by the effect image of a predetermined shape is performed according to the effect design performed by the pseudo continuous notice and the main effect effect mode by the character. Done.

  Here, in the pseudo continuous announcement, in the pseudo continuous production (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the production design 70a), a plurality of production designs 70a are not displayed in a specific combination display form (for example, a combination display form of reach loss). (For example, a chance symbol of “246”), the operation is temporarily stopped. Note that the effect design 70a may not be temporarily stopped at the chance eye symbol, but may be temporarily stopped at the pseudo continuous symbol. The pseudo consecutive symbol is a special symbol including a display of a character symbol such as "re" or "re" or a message of "NEXT", which indicates the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect. This pseudo consecutive symbol is a symbol that is not displayed when the normal fluctuation is performed, and is a special symbol that is displayed only when the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

  Pseudo continuous symbols (continuous symbols or NEXT symbols) are displayed in any of the display colors of "yellow", "green", and "red", and are expected to win a big hit in the order of "yellow" <"green" <"red" The degree is set to be high, and the display color of the pseudo-continuous symbol suggests the jackpot winning expectation. When the red pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, it is suggested that the jackpot winning (for example, the winning in the variable probability jackpot) is rich. Each display color of the pseudo consecutive symbols is determined based on the jackpot determination result of the special figure determination information and the variable effect pattern to be executed.

  In the pseudo continuous announcement, as a main effect, a battle effect, a story effect, and a line display effect (for example, “continue”, “may continue?”, “Chance! A display effect that suggests whether the jackpot winning expectation or the pseudo continuous production is continuously executed is performed by any of a plurality of types of production moving images such as character image display). When the suggestion effect is performed, the effect image of the suggestion effect is displayed in a layer higher than the variation display image of the effect symbol.

  In the pseudo continuous notice, the setting is such that the larger the number of times of performing the pseudo continuous production (pseudo 1 to 3), the higher the jackpot winning expectation. In addition, the reach effect may always be finally performed after the execution of the pseudo continuous notice. In this case, for example, in the case where the reach effect executed after the fluctuation of the pseudo 1 effect symbol and the reach effect executed after the fluctuation of the pseudo 2 effect symbol are the same effect content (mode), the effect of the pseudo 2 effect The reach effect after the symbol re-change is higher in the jackpot winning expectation than the reach effect after the re-change of the pseudo 1 effect symbol. In addition, "pseudo 4" in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed four times may be set so that the probability of a large hit is reached via the reach effect after the execution of the pseudo continuous notice.

  Further, the occurrence ratio of the type of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect performed. For example, the “reach determination” may be performed by performing the pseudo continuous production twice, and the “SP reach determination” may be performed by performing the pseudo continuous production three times. Further, during execution of the pseudo continuous notice, the number of executed pseudo continuous effects (for example, “× 2”) may be displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70.

  The highlight display color maintaining effect displays a flame effect image having a shape imitating a flame and performs a highlight display strongly appealing to a player's visual sense of a jackpot winning expectation with the display color of the flame effect image. Specifically, in the first image display device 70, when a rendition of an effect symbol or a suggestion effect by a character is performed in a display area including a central area of the display section, a display area near the left and right outer edges of the display section. The flame effect image in which the flame of a predetermined display color burns in a lamella and band shape is highlighted.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the display color of the flame effect image is displayed as any one of “yellow”, “green”, and “red”, and each of the three display colors is associated with the number of times of performing the pseudo continuous production. ing. Specifically, when the first pseudo continuous production is performed, a yellow flame effect image is displayed, and when the second pseudo continuous production is performed, a green effect image is displayed, and the third pseudo continuous production is performed. When done, a red flame effect image is displayed. The flame effect image of each display color associated with the number of times of the pseudo continuous production is continuously displayed while the rendition of the production design 70a or the suggestion production is being performed, and when the next pseudo continuous production is not performed. Ends.

  The jackpot winning expectation related to the display color of the flame effect image is in the order of “yellow” <“green” <“red” on the assumption that the jackpot winning expectation increases as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous production increases. As the jackpot winning expectation is high and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous production increases, the display color of the flame effect image changes stepwise in the order of “yellow” → “green” → “red”. When the fourth pseudo consecutive effect is performed, a rainbow-colored flame effect image may be displayed. The rainbow-colored flame effect image suggests that the winning jackpot has been confirmed.

  For example, in the fluctuating effect, when the effect symbol of the normal fluctuation (first fluctuation) temporarily stops and then fluctuates again (first pseudo consecutive effect: pseudo 1), a yellow flame effect image is displayed and the effect symbol is displayed. The yellow flame effect image is continuously displayed during the re-fluctuation of 70a, and when the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped and / or re-fluctuations (the second pseudo continuous production: pseudo 2), the green flame effect image is displayed. , And the green flame effect image is continuously displayed while the effect symbol 70a is changing again. In other words, the display color of the flame effect image changes every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. The display color of the flame effect image allows the player to grasp the number of times of the pseudo-sequence production and the jackpot winning expectation, and the display color of the flame effect image changes the player's expectation of the jackpot winning. It is possible to increase.

  Here, in the variable production in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed, in the case of a big hit, the pseudo 3 consecutive pseudo notice is set to be executed at a higher rate than the pseudo 1 and pseudo 2 consecutive notices. In the case of a loss, the pseudo-continuous notice of pseudo 1 is set to be executed at a higher rate than the pseudo-continuous notice of pseudo 2 and pseudo 3 (see FIGS. 50 and 51). Therefore, when the pseudo continuous notice is given in the losing fluctuation effect, it is difficult to change from the start of the display of the yellow flame effect image to the red flame effect image. On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous notice is performed in the jackpot fluctuation effect, the display tends to change from the display of the yellow flame effect image to the red flame effect image.

  The shape, display size, and movement of the effect may be changed without changing the display color of the effect image in accordance with the number of times of performing the pseudo consecutive effects. For example, highlight display is performed in which the display size of the flame effect image gradually increases as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous production increases.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of a suggested effect determination table that is referred to when a story effect is performed as the suggested effect performed in the pseudo continuous notice. In the suggested effect determination table, each of the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the effect content determination random value for the suggested effect, and the effect content (effects A to D) of the selected suggested effect are associated with each other. The effect content determination random value is allocated so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Then, one effect content is determined from a plurality of types of effect contents based on the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect performed and the acquired effect content determination random value.

  When the suggestion effect is performed in the pseudo continuous notice of the pseudo 2, the effect A having a lower jackpot expectation degree than the effects B to D has a higher selection ratio than the effects BD to D, while the pseudo 3 When the suggestion effect is performed in the pseudo continuous notice, the effect D, which has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the effects A to C, has a higher selection ratio than the effects A to C, that is, the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect is large. Accordingly, the ratio of the effect contents of the suggested effects having a high jackpot winning expectation degree is increased, and it is possible to greatly shake the player's expectation of the jackpot game by the effect contents of the suggested effects.

  FIG. 55: is a figure which shows the expectation degree of the big hit win of TOTAL by the execution frequency of a pseudo continuous production, the production content of a suggestion production, and the display color of a flame effect. As shown in FIG. 55, as the number of executions of the pseudo consecutive effects increases, the degree of expectation of the TOTAL jackpot win increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's expectation of winning the jackpot.

  For example, when the pseudo continuous notice of the pseudo 2 is performed, when the second pseudo continuous production is performed, the display color of the flame effect image changes from “yellow” to “green” and the rendition of the production symbol 70a is in progress. When the effect D is executed, the big hit expectation expectation of the TOTAL is higher than when the effects A to C are executed. For example, when the green flame effect image is displayed, the degree of expectation of winning the TOTOAL jackpot is higher when the suggestion effect of the effect D is performed than when the effect effect of the effect A is performed. Therefore, even if the green flame effect image is displayed, the player can have an expectation of winning a jackpot depending on the effect content of the suggested effect.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous announcement, when the effect design 70a is re-changing or when a suggestion effect by the character is being performed, the highlight display color is maintained by the display color of the flame effect image in accordance with the number of times the pseudo continuous effect is performed. As the effect is performed and the number of times of the pseudo continuous effect increases, the display color of the flame effect image changes to the display color one step higher than the display color being displayed, so the big hit is obtained. By visually appealing that the likelihood of winning will increase, and effectively raising the player's expectation, it is possible to further raise the player's attention to pseudo continuous notice and improve the interest of the game Becomes

Next, a highlight color maintaining effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the reach effect will be described.
Reach production includes the above-mentioned normal reach production, SP reach production, SPSP reach production, and full-rotation reach production (big hit confirmation production). <It is set to be higher in the order of full rotation reach production. It should be noted that, when the SPSP reach effect is finally executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when passing through the SP reach effect than when not passing through the SP reach effect.

  In the SP reach production / SPSP reach production, for example, a success (win) or a failure (defeat) that eventually indicates success (failure) using an animation image or a real image of a character related to a predetermined motif is used. A series of story productions that progress toward victory) or failure (defeat) is performed.

  For example, story effects performed in the SP / SPSP reach effect include battle effects and mission effects. The battle is directed to an animation in which an ally character (hereinafter referred to as an ally character) and an enemy character (hereinafter, an enemy character) confront each other. This is a series of story productions, in which when a loss occurs, the ally character is defeated by an enemy character and the battle is defeated.

  In the battle effect, for example, the degree of expectation of battle victory is set according to the number of ally characters confronting the enemy character, and the order of “1” <“2” <“3” <“4”, that is, The expectation of battle victory is set to increase as the number of friendly characters increases. In addition, it is set so that a battle victory is always obtained when there are four friendly characters. In addition, from the start of the battle to the battle victory or defeat, the battle stage and the ally in a change stage in which the number of the ally characters gradually increases (chance up) as the number of ally characters increases in a stepwise manner. Any of the non-change stage battle effects in which the number of characters does not increase is performed.

  The mission production is, for example, an animation in which one or more characters challenge a mission to find a treasure.The production is a successful production that suggests a successful mission to find a treasure at the time of a jackpot, but a treasure cannot be found at the time of a loss. This is a series of story productions that will be a failed production that suggests a mission failure.

  In the mission production, for example, the number of characters searching for treasure is "1" <"2" <"3" <"4", that is, as the number of characters increases, the success of the mission increases. It is set to increase the expectation. In addition, it is set so that the mission is always successful when there are four players. In addition, from the start of the mission to the success or failure of the mission, the possibility of the success of the mission increases as the number of characters gradually increases (the chances increase). One of the mission effects in a non-change stage in which the number of characters does not increase.

  The highlight color maintaining effect is a battle effect (or a mission effect) in which, when a main effect is performed by a character, a large number of beads such as jewels are continuously connected like a chain. In addition to displaying the chain effect image, the display color of the chain effect image is used to highlight the jackpot winning expectation to the player's vision. Specifically, in the first image display device 70, when a battle is performed between the ally character and the enemy character in the central region of the display unit, a chain of a predetermined display color is displayed in the display region near the left and right outer edges of the display unit. The effect image is highlighted.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the display color of the chain effect image is displayed as one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and each of the four display colors corresponds to the number of characters appearing. It is attached. Specifically, when the number of ally characters that battle with the enemy character is “1”, a blue chain effect image is displayed, when “2”, a green chain effect image is displayed, and “3”. ”, A red chain effect image is displayed. If“ four ”, a rainbow chain effect image is displayed. During the battle, the display color corresponding to the number of friendly characters is maintained. Display is continued.

  The jackpot win expectation degree related to the display color of the chain effect image is “blue” <“green” <“red” on the assumption that the jackpot win expectation degree increases as the number of friendly characters increases (increases). "<Rainbow> in the order of big hits, and the display color of the chain effect image is" blue "→" green "→" red "→" rainbow "as the number of friendly characters increases one by one "In that order. In addition, it is suggested that the rainbow chain effect image is determined to have been won in the 16R probability change jackpot (rich).

  FIGS. 57 and 58 are diagrams illustrating an example of a battle effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a battle effect pattern when a battle effect is performed in the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. In the battle effect pattern determination table, the jackpot determination result, the type of the reach effect (SP reach effect / SPSP reach effect), the random value for battle effect pattern determination, and the battle effect pattern are associated with each other. (%), A random number for battle effect pattern determination is assigned. For reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) of each reach effect pattern is described in the rightmost column. One battle effect pattern is determined from a plurality of types of battle effect patterns based on the jackpot determination result, the type of the reach effect, and the acquired random value for battle effect pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 57, battle production patterns 1 to 7 corresponding to the lost SP reach production and the SPSP reach production are defeat productions in which one or more ally characters lose a battle confrontation with an enemy character, and are promoted. This is a production that indicates that the production and the resurrection production are not performed. In the battle effect patterns 1 to 7, the jackpot winning expectation degree differs depending on the number of friendly characters. Note that the types of friendly characters and enemy characters are different between the battle effect patterns 1 to 4 executed in the lost SPSP reach effect and the battle effect patterns 5 to 7 executed in the lost SPSP reach effect.

  For example, in the battle effect pattern 1 corresponding to the loss SP reach effect, one ally character and an enemy character attack each other, and then one ally character attacks the enemy character with three types of techniques (“Kick”). , "Punch" or "special technique"), but ultimately loses.

  For example, in the battle effect pattern 7 corresponding to the loss SPSP reach effect, after one ally character and an enemy character attack each other, the number of ally characters increases by one via a predetermined transition effect to two people. After the two ally characters and the enemy character attack each other, the number of the ally characters increases to one via the transition effect and becomes three, and the three ally characters become the enemy characters. Attack with any of the three techniques, but eventually lose.

  Here, the transition production is a production suggesting that the production is shifted (developed) to a production having a higher expectation of victory (success) than the production being performed, and is performed in a production form different from the production form of the battle production. For example, when an ally character and an enemy character are attacking each other, the entire display unit suddenly blacks out (or whites out).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, the jackpot SP reach production and the battle production patterns 11 to 22 corresponding to the SPSP reach production are victory productions in which a plurality of ally characters win a battle confrontation with an enemy character. It is an effect that suggests that an effect and a resurrection effect will be performed. In the battle effect patterns 11 to 22, the jackpot winning expectation degree differs depending on the number of friendly characters. It should be noted that the types of friendly characters and enemy characters are different between the battle effect patterns 11 to 17 executed in the jackpot SP reach effect and the battle effect patterns 18 to 22 executed in the jackpot SPSP reach effect.

  For example, the battle effect pattern 11 corresponding to the jackpot SP reach effect is such that after one ally character and an enemy character attack each other, one ally character increases to two people via the transition effect, This is a victory effect in which two ally characters attack the enemy character with any of the three types of techniques and ultimately win.

  For example, the battle production pattern 20 corresponding to the jackpot SPSP reach production is such that after one ally character and an enemy character attack each other, one more ally character is added via a transitional production to two people. After the two ally characters and the enemy character attack each other, two more ally characters increase to four via the transition effect, and the four ally characters become enemy characters This is a victory style in which one of the three techniques attacks and finally wins.

  The chain effect image is displayed at the start of the battle, and the display color of the chain effect image changes when the number of friendly characters increases (when the transition effect occurs). As a change mode of the display color of the chain effect image, the jackpot expectation degree of the display color being displayed is changed to a display color one level higher than the display color being displayed, in accordance with the number of ally characters after the transition effect. → "green", "green" → "red", "red" → "rainbow": 1UP) and the jackpot winning expectation changes to the display color two levels higher than the display color being displayed ( “Blue” → “red”, “green” → “rainbow”: 2UP) in some cases. When the display color of the chain effect changes, the jackpot winning expectation does not change to a display color one or more stages lower than the display color being displayed.

  Specifically, when the battle effect of the battle effect pattern 1 is performed, the number of the ally characters remains alone and does not increase, so that the blue chain effect continues to be displayed, that is, the display color of the chain effect does not change. On the other hand, when the battle effect of the battle effect pattern 4 is performed, the display color of the chain effect image is changed from “blue” to “green” to “red” as the number of friendly characters increases one by one after the start of the battle. In a stepwise manner. When a battle effect of battle effect pattern 3 is performed, after the start of the battle, the number of one ally character increases at a stretch to become three, so the display color of the chain effect image is changed from "blue" to "red" in two stages. Change.

  In the battle effect corresponding to the loss SP reach effect, the ratio at which battle effect pattern 1 in which the number of friendly characters does not increase after the start of the battle is set higher than the ratio at which battle effect patterns 2 to 4 are selected. , The display color of the chain effect image is hard to change. On the other hand, in the battle effect corresponding to the losing SPSP reach effect, since the number of friendly characters increases even if any of the battle effect patterns 5 to 7 is selected after the start of the battle, the display color of the chain effect image is likely to change. I can say.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 57, in the battle production corresponding to the loss SP reach production and the SPSP reach production, the number of the ally characters does not increase to four. Therefore, after the battle starts, the display color of the chain effect image is changed to “ It does not change to the "rainbow".

  Although illustration is omitted, when a mission effect is performed in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, similarly to the battle effect, the display colors corresponding to the number of characters increased by the transition effect after the start of the mission after the start of the mission. It is configured to change to a chain effect image.

  In the SP reach and SPSP reach productions, when a battle production is being performed, it is possible to execute a speech notice indicating the jackpot expectation expectancy, and if the speech announcement is made, the victory expectancy is high (the jackpot election). It is possible to execute a chance up notice that suggests that it will develop into a (highly expected) production. Whether or not to execute the dialogue announcement is determined by lottery based on the variable effect pattern to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the dialogue announcement determination table includes a jackpot determination result, the final reach type of the determined variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and the determined dialogue announcement. The pattern is associated with the presence or absence of the execution of the speech notice, and an effect configuration (effect manner) when the speech notice is executed is described in the rightmost column for reference.

  The jackpot winning expectation degree related to the line announcement pattern is set to be higher in the order of line announcement pattern 1 <line announcement pattern 2 <line announcement pattern 3 <line announcement pattern 4. In the case of a battle performance in which the jackpot determination result is lost, the ratio at which the dialogue notice pattern 1 is selected is set higher than the ratio at which the dialogue notice patterns 2 to 4 are selected. In the case of a battle effect that results in a jackpot, the ratio at which the dialogue notice pattern 3 is selected is set higher than the ratio at which the dialogue notice patterns 1, 2, and 4 are selected. In the line notice pattern 0, lines that do not indicate the jackpot winning expectation degree are displayed.

  Here, the “low expectation serif” of the item of the serif image in the serif notice determination table is a serif that expects a possibility of winning a jackpot (for example, “chance may be !?”, “something may exist!” , Etc.) are displayed, and the "high expectation dialogue" is a dialogue (for example, "chance !!", "excitement !!", etc.) that is expected to have a high possibility of winning a jackpot. It is displayed.

  The jackpot winning expectation indicated by each line type is set so as to increase in the order of low expectation line <high expectation line. It should be noted that the jackpot winning expectation of a plurality of lines provided for each line type is made different, and one line is determined by lottery from the plurality of lines.

  The display color (character color) of each line is displayed in one of “black”, “blue”, “red”, and “gold”. The jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is set to increase in the order of “black” <“blue” <“red” <“gold”. Therefore, even if the contents of the dialogue are the same (for example, red “chance !!” and gold “chance !!”), the jackpot winning expectation degree differs depending on the character color. It should be noted that the golden high expectation dialogue is not displayed in the lost SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. That is, when the gold high expectation dialogue is displayed, it is suggested that the jackpot winning is rich.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the chance up notice execution determination table, the execution rate (%) of the chance up notice is associated with the dialogue notice patterns 1 to 3, and when a high expectation dialogue is performed, , The execution rate is set higher than in the case where the normal dialogue or the low expectation dialogue is performed.

  The execution rate of the chance-up notice is set higher in the case of the jackpot SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect than in the case of the loss SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. In addition, in the case of the SPSP reach production of the jackpot, when the golden high expectation dialogue is displayed, a chance up notice is always performed.

  In the chance up notice, the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advanced position with light emission of a predetermined color to perform a character action effect, and the character image of “CHANCE UP” accompanying the start of the operation of the movable effect member 73 Is displayed. The character image of “CHANCE UP” is displayed in one of the display colors (character colors) of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and the jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is “red” ”<“ Green ”<“ red ”<“ rainbow ”. The movable effect member 73 can emit light in any of the colors “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and emits light in the same color as the display color of the character image. I do.

  In the case of a loss determination result, the selection rate of “blue” is set higher than the determination result of the jackpot, whereas, in the case of the determination result of the jackpot, the selection rate of “red” is higher than the determination result of the loss. It is set high. The “rainbow” is set so as to be selected in the case of the jackpot determination result and not selected in the case of the loss determination result.

  As described above, when a battle effect or a mission effect is performed during the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect, a highlight display color maintaining effect using a chain effect image is performed. Since the display color of the effect image changes to a display color indicating that the jackpot winning expectation degree is higher by one or two levels than the display color being displayed, it is evident that the possibility of winning the jackpot increases. By appealing effectively and effectively inflating the player's expectation of winning the jackpot, the player's attention to the reach effect can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when a battle or mission effect is being performed, a dialogue or a chance-up notice is performed, and the contents of the dialogue image of the dialogue notice, the display color of the dialogue image, a character action effect in the chance-up notice, and characters. Depending on the display color of the image, it is possible to increase the expectations of the player for winning the jackpot.

Next, a highlight color maintaining effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the pre-reading notice will be described.
The pre-reading notice is a notice that expects that there is a possibility that a jackpot may be won over the variable production corresponding to one or more special figure fluctuation displays before the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display to be announced is started. It is a production.

  The pre-reading advance notice is executed when the special drawing determination information is stored (hold-stored) in the storage unit and a condition for executing the pre-reading advance notice is satisfied, and when the lottery is determined by the lottery that determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice is executed. , The latest special map determination information stored in the storage unit is set as a prefetch target. As a condition for executing the pre-reading notice, for example, two or more special figure determination information including a pre-read target is stored in the storage unit and 1 Alternatively, it is set that the special figure determination information of the jackpot is not stored in the plurality of special figure determination information.

  When the condition for executing the prefetching notice is satisfied, the presence or absence of the execution of the prefetching notice is determined (determined) using the lookahead notice execution determination table shown in FIG. The look-ahead notice execution determination table is a decision value to be compared with the look-ahead notice determination random number value obtained from the notice determination random number (0 to 99) at the time of the advance determination processing, and determines whether or not the look-ahead notice execution is performed. Is determined in advance for each pending storage number.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the execution rate of the prefetch notice differs depending on the number of storages to be suspended. Specifically, when the number of pending storages is four, when the fourth special figure determination information to be reserved is to be prefetched, the execution rate is 60%, and when the number of pending storages is three, In the case where the third special figure determination information to be prefetched is to be prefetched, when the execution rate is 30% and the number of retained storages is two, the second special figure determination information to be prefetched is prefetched. If it is targeted, the execution rate is set to 3%. That is, it is set so that the execution rate of the pre-reading advance notice becomes higher as the number of reserved storage of the special figure determination information is larger. Since the effect based on the look-ahead notice is performed over a long period of time, it is possible to increase a player's sense of expectation of a big hit and a feeling of excitement until the design change effect of the look-ahead object is performed.

  The look-ahead notice includes a continuous notice effect and a pending icon change notice effect. As a continuous announcement effect, the movement of the movable effect member 73 over one or a plurality of variable effects including a zone effect in one or more variable effects including a variable effect of a prefetch target, and one or more variable effects including a variable effect of a prefetch target. Chance to stop and display three effect symbols in an array with a predetermined regularity over one or more loss fluctuation effects prior to the continuous step-up notice effect that performs stepwise step effects and the variable effect of the prefetch target. It is possible to execute an effect continuous announcement effect in which the display color of the effect image is gradually changed over one or a plurality of loss variation effects including an eye announcement effect, a fluctuation effect of a prefetch target, and the like.

  When the effect continuous announcement effect is executed as the prefetch announcement, the display unit is displayed on the first image display device 70 over a plurality of loss variation effect execution periods (a predetermined number of variation zones) until the variation effect of the prefetch target is performed. A specific character is displayed in the center area of the character, a ring-shaped effect image surrounding the character is displayed in a predetermined area of the display area in the outer edge direction than the display area of the character, and a loss variation effect is performed. Each time the effect image is displayed, the display color of the effect image changes in a stepwise manner, so that a highlight that strongly appeals to the player's visual sense of the jackpot winning expectation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the display color of the effect image displayed in the effect continuous announcement effect is any one of “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. The jackpot winning expectation indicated by the display color is set to increase in the order of “blue” <“yellow” <“green” <“red” <“rainbow”. Note that "rainbow" is displayed when the pre-reading target variable effect is a jackpot fluctuation effect.

  In the effect continuous announcement effect, the display color of the effect image can be changed based on a preset change scenario. A plurality of change scenario determination tables for determining a change scenario are provided. The plurality of change scenario determination tables include the number of special figure determination information stored in the storage unit (the number of reserved storages), the preliminary determination result of the special figure determination information to be pre-read, and the variable effect performed in the variable effect of the pre-read target. Classified according to pattern.

  Each change scenario determination table is associated with a reservation to be prefetched, a fluctuation effect pattern of a fluctuation effect to be prefetched, a random number for scenario determination, and a scenario, so that a predetermined selection rate (%) is obtained. A random number for scenario determination is allocated.

  For example, when the number of suspensions to be prefetched is the fourth, the scenario determination table shown in FIG. 62 (2) is referred to, and the random number for scenario determination is allocated so that the selectivity (%) shown in FIG. Have been. For reference, the effect configuration (effect mode) of each scenario is described in the rightmost column.

  In the case where the pre-judgment result and the pre-reading variation production are loss variation production patterns, one of scenarios 1 and 2 is selected, and scenario 2 in which the final change mode of the display color of the effect image is “green” is The selection ratio is set higher than in scenario 1 in which the final change mode is “red”. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot fluctuation effect pattern, any one of the scenarios 3, 4 and 5 is selected, and the scenario 3 in which the display color of the effect image is increased by one step and the final change mode is red is the scenario 4 , The selection ratio is set higher than 5.

  It is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot over the period until the change effect of the prefetch target is performed by the change of the display color of the effect image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the prefetch notice effect. It becomes possible.

Next, a repeated emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the result notification effect will be described.
The result notification effect is given to the player before the fixed stop display is performed in the combination display mode indicating that the three effect symbols are the jackpot in the variable effect of the jackpot (before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol). Notify the winner of the jackpot.

The main effects performed in the result notification effect include a character action effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect.
For example, before the fixed action display in the combination display mode indicating that the three effect symbols are a big hit, the role action effect is, for example, a movable effect in a standby position above the display unit of the first image display device 70. The member 73 moves to an advanced position that covers at least a part of the front side of the display unit (screen) with light emission of a predetermined color, and then performs a series of moving operations to return to the standby position.

In the sound effect, the sound output device 9 outputs a definite sound dedicated to jackpot winning (BGM or SE dedicated to jackpot winning) for a predetermined time.
In the lamp effect, the lamps of the board lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 are lighted for a predetermined time in a lighting pattern dedicated to jackpot winning different from a normal lighting pattern. In addition, as the main production, only one of the character production production, the sound production, and the lamp production may be performed, or the production operation production and the sound production, the production operation production and the lamp production, Alternatively, the character action effect, the sound effect, and the lamp effect may be performed in parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the repeated emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect (the role action effect, the sound effect, and the lamp effect), in the first image display device 70, the color of the glow radiated radially over the entire display unit is displayed. A rainbow flash image of a light emission mode that repeatedly changes continuously and instantaneously in the order of "red" → "orange" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "indigo" → "purple" Highlighting is performed.

  Specifically, when the accessory operation effect is performed, a rainbow flash image is displayed with the start of the operation in which the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advance position with light emission of a predetermined color, and the rainbow flash image is displayed. , Are continuously displayed until the movable effect member 73 returns to the standby position. In the result notification effect, when the repeated emphasis effect is performed, compared to the case where the repetitive emphasis effect is not performed, the synergistic effect of the character action effect effect and the repetitive emphasis effect can give a strong impact to the player, and the dramatic effect can be provided. It can produce a visual effect that appeals visually.

  When the sound effect is performed, a rainbow flash image is displayed with the start of the output of the jackpot determination sound from the audio output device 9 and is continuously performed until the output of the jackpot determination sound ends. Further, when the lamp effect is performed, a rainbow flash image is displayed along with the start of lighting of the lamp illuminator of the board lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 in a lighting pattern dedicated to the jackpot, and the lighting ends. It continues until you do.

  The display mode of the flash image may be changed according to the type of the main effect. For example, a rainbow flash image may be displayed in the character action effect, a gold flash image may be displayed in the sound effect, and a beetle flash image may be displayed in the lamp effect.

Next, a repeated emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the jackpot effect will be described.
The jackpot effect is a notification effect that informs that the type of the jackpot and the number of rounds of the jackpot game have been determined after the jackpot symbol is determined and stopped and displayed in the variable effect. As the main effect of the jackpot effect, for example, “SUPER BONUS” indicating that the 16R certain-variable jackpot has been determined is displayed on the display unit of the first image display device 70, “BIG BONUS” indicating that the 10R certain-variable jackpot has been determined, and 5R. Usually, a character image such as "BONUS" indicating that the jackpot has been determined is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the repeated emphasis production corresponding to the main production, when the first image display device 70 displays a character image indicating the type of the jackpot type on the display unit, the character image is displayed from behind the character image. Highlighting is performed by a halo flash image (fixed flash image) in a light-emitting mode in which a change display in which the display color of a ring with a striation extending radially as if an umbrella is opened is repeatedly performed. The halo flash image is displayed continuously while the character image is displayed. In addition, a specific sound or a notification sound is output from the sound output device 9 in accordance with the display of the halo flash image, and the light emitters of the lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and / or the frame lighting device 10 are turned on and off. I do.

  The halo flash image has a different light emitting display mode depending on the content of the jackpot type determination information indicated by the character image. Specifically, when a character image of “SUPER BONUS” is displayed, a halo flash A image is displayed from behind the character image, and the light emission mode of the halo flash A image is radial from behind the character image. A change display of a pattern in which a ring with a spreading streak alternates instantaneously between red and yellow is repeatedly performed.

  When the character image of “BIG BONUS” is displayed, the halo flash B image is displayed from behind the character image, and the light emission mode of the halo flash B image has a streak radiating from behind the character image. The change display of a pattern in which the wheel alternately changes instantaneously between red and blue is repeatedly performed.

  When the character image of “BONUS” is displayed, the halo flash C image is displayed from behind the character image, and the light emission mode of the halo flash C image is a ring with a streak extending radially from behind the character image. Are repeatedly displayed repeatedly in a pattern that changes instantaneously alternately between red and green.

  In the jackpot effect, when performing a repeated emphasis production, compared to the case where no repetition emphasis production is performed, a visual display with an impact that attracts the player's attention by performing highlighting that emphasizes the fixed information indicated by the character image It is possible to enhance the joy of winning the jackpot of the player and to enhance the euphoria to the climax.

Next, a repeated emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the mode notification effect will be described.
The mode notification effect is a notification effect for notifying the type of the effect mode set corresponding to the gaming state. In the mode notification effect, a character image display indicating the type of the effect mode set corresponding to the gaming state is performed as the main effect. For example, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), mode determination information such as “XX RUSH entry” and “XX mode entry” is displayed. For example, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probable change game state, a character image of “Zan RUSH rush” indicating the confirmation of the probable change mode is displayed. A character image of “Enter Chance Time” is displayed.

  Here, the effect mode is for notifying the currently set gaming state. Specifically, in the normal game state (non-time saving game state), a normal mode for notifying that the current game state is the normal game state is set, and in the probable change game state, the current game state is changed. A probable change mode for notifying that the player is in the game state is set, and a time reduction mode for notifying that the current game state is the time reduction game state is set in the time reduction game state.

  In setting the effect mode corresponding to the current game state, for example, an effect image for notifying the current game state is displayed on the first image display device 70, and / or the background displayed on the first image display device 70. By making the display mode of the image, the character image, and the effect design 70a different from the display mode in the other effect modes, the current gaming state is notified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, in the normal mode, stages 1 to 3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of stage effects having different effect modes, and the stages 1 to 3 correspond to the background displayed on the first image display device 70. The effect of the image is different. For example, a stage 1 displays a background image with a spring motif, a stage 2 displays a background image with a summer motif, and a stage 3 displays a background image with a winter motif. In addition, even in the probability change mode, a plurality of stage effects with different effect modes are prepared.

  In the normal mode, for example, the stage is set to be switched in a certain order every time a predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, 50 times) is reached. For example, stage 1 ⇒ stage 2 ⇒ stage 3 ⇒ stage 1. The stages are switched in accordance with the switching order of the repetition of. Further, as the predetermined switching condition, for example, the normal stage may be switched in accordance with the above-described stage switching order from the next variable effect triggered by the reach loss, or the stage switching order may be triggered by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player. May be switched according to the following.

  The display patterns of the effect symbols 70a executed in each of the stages 1 to 3 are different. The effect symbol 70a includes an identification unit 70b composed of code information of numbers or characters indicating “1” to “9” or “1” to “9”, depending on the type of the stage corresponding to the game state. There are a case where the decoration unit 70c is composed of predetermined decoration information (accompanying information) such as a character image and a decoration frame image attached to the periphery (nearby) of the unit 70b, and a case where the decoration unit 70b is composed of only the identification unit 70b. (See FIG. 67 (1)).

  Specifically, the display mode of the effect design 70a at the stage 1 is as follows: the identification part of the numbers “1” to “9” and the character image “dog, cat, tiger” Etc. ". The display mode of the effect design 70a at the stage 2 is composed of the identification portions of "1" to "9" and the decoration portion of the character image related to the predetermined motif. The display mode of the effect symbol 70a at the stage 3 is composed of only the identification units “1” to “9”. As described above, in the normal mode, at stage 1 and 2, the effect design 70a of the design with high decorativeness combining the identification unit and the decoration unit is displayed, and at stage 3, the effect design of the design constituted only by the identification unit. 70a is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the repeated emphasis effect corresponding to the main effect performed in the mode notification effect, when a character image indicating mode determination information is displayed on first image display device 70, the character image behind the character image is displayed. After that, the highlight display is performed by the halo flash image (fixed flash image).

  Specifically, when the probability change mode is set, a ring with striations radially spreading radially in the direction of the outer edge of the display unit from behind the character image indicating the determination of the probability change mode changes instantaneously alternately between gold and silver. The highlight display is performed by the halo flash a image in the light emission mode in which the pattern change display is repeatedly performed, and the halo flash a image is continuously performed while the character image is displayed.

  When the time-saving mode is set, the change display of the pattern in which the ring with the streaks radiating radially in the direction of the outer edge of the display unit from the back of the character image indicating the time-saving mode is instantaneously changed alternately between blue and green is displayed. The highlighting is performed using the halo flash b image that is repeatedly performed in the light emission mode, and the halo flash b image is continuously performed while the character image is displayed.

  In the mode notification effect, when the repeated emphasis effect is performed, compared to when the repeated emphasis effect is not performed, the impact that attracts the player's attention by performing the emphasized display that emphasizes the character image indicating the mode determination information It is possible to produce a visual effect that appeals to the player, and it is possible for the player to reliably grasp the current game state.

  Next, a description will be given of a specific example of the effect including the display mode of the highlight effect (highlight display maintaining effect, repeated highlight effect) displayed on the first image display device 70.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (1), the normal mode is set corresponding to the normal game state, and in the stage 1 of the normal mode (a background image (not shown) with a motif of spring), the first display units 70B1 to 70B1 are displayed. B4 is a state where four first holding icons H11 to H14 are displayed and the second display icons 70D1 to 70D4 are not displaying the second holding icons, and the holding number “4” is displayed in the first holding number display area 70E. Is displayed and the holding number "0" is displayed in the second holding number display area 70F, and the combination display mode "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger) in which three effect symbols 70a indicate a normal loss. )), And the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of “216” as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

  The variable display of the special symbol TZ is continuously performed in a certain display mode during a period from the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol to the stop display, and disappears from the screen or is shielded by the movable effect member 73. And is always visible. The special symbol TZ is composed of code information of numerals “1” to “9”. Also, like the special symbol TZ, the reserved numbers in the first and second reserved number display areas 70E and 70F are always visible so that they do not disappear from the screen or are shielded by the movable effect member 73. Is displayed.

  "Dog, cat, tiger" in the decorative portion 70c of the three effect designs 70a of "2 (dog) 1 (cat) 6 (tiger)" displayed as the fixed stop is a small motion of shaking the head vertically or horizontally (or When the identification unit 70a makes a small change such as shining, the next variation effect is started. The minute movement of the decorative portion 70c of the three effect symbols 70a may be performed before the three effect symbols 70a are determined and displayed. The minute movement of the decoration 70c of the effect symbol 70a is a variable effect start suggestion effect indicating the start of the next variable effect or a symbol confirmation suggestion effect indicating that the symbol combination display mode to be stopped and displayed is determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (2), with the start of the change, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C, and the first hold icon H11 is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from “4” to “3”. In addition, although the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the up-down direction, scrolling in the left-right direction may be performed, or switching or rotation (rotation) on the spot may be performed. good.

  After the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 67 (3), the effect symbol 70a of “2 (dog)” is temporarily stopped in the left area, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (4), “2 (dog)” is displayed in the right area. Effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, and the left and right effect symbols 70a are in the reach state where they are aligned with the same symbol "2 (dog)".

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (5), when the li-zhi state is reached, the left and right effect symbols 70a are separated from the predetermined stop position shown in FIG. 67 (4) and are located near the left and right outer edges. After performing the movement effect ME that temporarily stops at the movement position where the movement has been performed, the normal reach effect or the SP / SPSP reach effect is performed. With this movement effect ME, it is possible to expect that there is a possibility of developing into SP / SPSP reach effect.

  If the SP / SPSP reach effect does not evolve after the move effect ME, a normal reach effect of varying the central effect diagram 70a is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), an effect of “3 (rabbit)” The symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped by returning from the movement position shown in FIG. 67 (5) to the predetermined stop position shown in FIG. 67 (4). Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)” indicating reach loss, and may be reach loss. Be informed.

  On the other hand, in the case of developing into the SP / SPSP reach effect after the movement effect ME, a predetermined transition effect SH is performed via the normal effect as shown in FIG. 68 (8), and the SP / SPSP reach effect is performed. Develop. As the transition effect SH, it is possible to perform an effect in which the display of the effect symbol 70a becomes thin and disappears by temporarily turning the entire display unit white (whiteout) or blackening (blackout). . In addition, the left and right effect symbols 70a rotate and then move to the display area near the upper right and left ends of the display unit, and the decoration symbol 70c is reduced to a reduced symbol ZG of “2” of only the identification unit (number). A switching effect is performed. In addition, even during the transition effect SH, the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ and the first reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number in the second reserved number display area 70F are continuously displayed in a visible state.

  Note that, with the start of the transition effect SH, the display of the hold icon (including the hold icon display area) being displayed is not displayed. In this case, the hold icon (including the hold icon display area) is not displayed even during the subsequent execution period of the SP / SPSP reach effect. By displaying only the icon (including the icon display area) when the transition effect SH is being performed, the icon changes to the icon on the side with a higher expectation of the jackpot winning, and the icon of the jackpot winning is displayed. It is possible to expect that an SP / SPSP reach effect with a high degree of expectation will be executed. It should be noted that the hold numbers displayed in the hold number display areas 70E and 70F are continuously displayed in a visible state even during the reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (9), when the SP reach effect is performed, a battle effect is performed as the SP reach effect (not shown). If this effect fails, as shown in FIG. 68 (6) and 68 (7) after the symbol “3” is temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is highlighted so as to be more conspicuous than the reduced symbol ZG of the left and right “2”. As shown in Fig. 7, after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode "2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)" indicating the reach loss, a fixed stop is displayed and the loss is notified. Is done.

  After that, when the “dog, rabbit, dog” in the decorative portion 70c of the effect design 70a of “2 (dog) 3 (rabbit) 2 (dog)” displayed with the confirmation stop performed a minute motion, the next variable effect starts. Is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (11), with the start of the change, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C, and the first hold icon H11 is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from “3” to “2”.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 69 (12), an operation promoting effect for prompting the operation of the effect button is performed. In the operation promotion effect, a light-colored button imitating the current effect button 17 and an operation promotion image indicating a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 are displayed. Further, the button light emitting LED 17d is turned on, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (13), when the effect button 17 is operated, a line display effect is performed, and a line image M0 of "I'm gonna expect" of a high expectation line is displayed. In addition, when the button vibration motor 17c operates, the effect button 17 changes to a vibration state (specific state), and the sound output device 9 outputs a vibration sound (“bull bull”) to perform a button change effect. . Further, the button light emitting LED 17d is turned off, and the light emission of the effect button 17 is stopped. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 ends, the line display effect and the button change effect continue. In addition, in the case of the line display effect, when the line image of the low expectation line is displayed, the button change effect is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (14), the operation of the button vibration motor 17c and the output of the vibration sound from the sound output device 9 are stopped while the line display effect continues.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (15), after the execution period of the line display effect has elapsed, the line image is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 70 (16), the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)” is displayed in the left area. Is temporarily stopped, and subsequently, the effect symbol 70a of “5 (koala)” is temporarily stopped in the right area. Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (17), the yellow NEXT symbol 70a1 is temporarily stopped in the center area, and the yellow flame effect FE is displayed in the display areas near the left and right outer edges of the display unit 70, and the simulation is performed. A continuous notice is given. Note that, instead of temporarily stopping the NEXT symbol 70a1, the flame effect FE may be displayed by highlighting only the character symbol "ream" with a display size larger than the normal display size. .

  The re-fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is started, and as shown in FIG. 70 (18), the yellow flame effect FE is continuously displayed during the re-fluctuation of the simulated 1 effect symbol 70a, and the jackpot winning expectation degree and the like. A suggestion effect (effect A (see FIG. 54)) indicating whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is executed is performed, and the illustration of the suggestion effect is omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (19), the effect symbol 70a of “6 (tiger)” is temporarily stopped in the left area, and subsequently, the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)” is temporarily stopped in the right area. Then, a sign effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that the pseudo continuous effect is performed continuously is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (20), in the indication effect, an effect display operation in which at least some of the effect images displayed on the display unit move or deform, that is, a so-called shake vision effect is performed. Along with the start of the shake vision effect, a character action effect is performed.

  In the role action effect, the timing is from the timing when the movable effect member 73 starts moving from the standby position to the advanced position to the time when the return of the movable effect member 73 moved to the advanced position to the standby position is completed.

  In the shake vision effect, the frame display 70 that defines the display area of the display unit is switched from the non-shake state to the shake state, and the rectangular (or square) shape frame display 70 in the non-shake state is replaced with a rhombus (or trapezoid) shape frame display 70A. The effect image different from the display mode of the diamond-shaped frame display 70A is displayed on the display unit 70B other than the diamond-shaped frame display 70A on the display unit. Further, various images of the frame display 70A are displayed in a display mode modified according to the modification of the frame display.

  Specifically, under the influence of the frame display 70 in the non-shake state being deformed to a contracted state from the non-shake state, the effect image of the pseudo continuous notice of the frame display 70A (pseudo fluctuation of the effect design, suggestive effect) , Flame effects) and effect images relating to the hold display (the icon TH and the hold icon (including the icon display area and the hold icon display area)) are displayed in a reduced size, and the entire image is recessed rightward from left. The display unit 70B other than the frame display 70A displays, for example, a lightning flash image of a predetermined color in a light emission mode such as a lightning strike. In addition, the display of the change of the special symbol TZ and the display of the reserved numbers in the reserved number display areas 70E and 70F are continuously displayed in a state in which the display size is not deformed and visible even in the shake state.

  In executing the shake vision effect, the frame portion 70A1 of the frame edge of the frame display 70A is displayed in one of the display colors “blue”, “green”, and “zebra pattern” based on the jackpot determination result of the special figure determination information. The jackpot winning expectation related to the displayed and displayed colors is set to increase in the order of “blue” <“green” <“zebra pattern”. In the case of a loss determination result, it is set so that the ratio of selecting “blue” is higher than the determination result of the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of the determination result of the jackpot, “green” is more determined than the determination result of the loss. , And “Zebra pattern” are set so as to increase the ratio.

  In executing the shake vision effect, based on the jackpot determination result of the special figure determination information, the images on the display unit 70B other than the frame display 70A are displayed as “blue flash image”, “green flash image”, and “rainbow flash image”. , And the jackpot winning expectation for each flash image is set to be higher in the order of “blue flash image” <“green flash image” <“rainbow flash image”. In the case of the determination result of the loss, it is set so that the ratio of selecting the “blue flash image” is higher than the determination result of the jackpot, while, in the case of the determination result of the jackpot, the determination result of the loss is The setting is such that the rate at which the “green flash image” is selected increases. Since the “rainbow flash image” is selected only in the case of the jackpot determination result, it indicates that the jackpot winning has been determined.

  In this way, by performing the shake vision production during the pseudo continuous announcement, it is possible to expect (predict) that there is a high possibility that the pseudo continuous production will be continuously performed. In addition, the shake vision production and the character action production Because of the synergistic effect with the above, it is possible to perform an effect that visually appeals with an impact, so that it is possible to further enhance the interest of the effect of the pseudo continuous announcement and to enhance the interest of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (21), when returning from the frame display 70A1 in the shake state to the frame display 70 in the non-shake state, the green NEXT pattern 70a1 is temporarily stopped in the center area, and the display color of the flame effect FE is changed. The icon TH changes from “yellow” to “green”, the icon TH changes to a blue character icon TH, and the second generated notification sound is output for 0.5 seconds.

  The re-fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is started, and as shown in FIG. 71 (22), the green flame effect FE is continuously displayed during the re-fluctuation of the simulated effect symbol 70a, and a suggestion effect (effect B) ) Is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (23), the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped in the left area while the green flame effect FE is continuously displayed. Subsequently, in the right area, a reach-inducing effect indicating whether or not reach has been established or not has been established by indicating whether or not the effect symbol 70a of "4 (chicken)" is temporarily stopped is performed.

  In the reach-pumping effect, the character C1 appears, and the character C1 makes a kick attack on the “3 (rabbit)” effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the right area, and “3 (rabbit) is produced by the kick attack. )) Is destroyed, and an effect is performed to incite that there is a possibility that the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)” will temporarily stop. It should be noted that the flame effect FE may be hidden during the reach-inducing effect, in order to attract the player's attention to the effect symbol 70a. With this reach-promoting effect, it is possible to excite the player's expectation about whether or not the player will be in the reach state.

  If the design symbol 70a of “3 (rabbit)” is finally stopped temporarily without being destroyed in the reach-pumping production, as shown in FIG. 72 (24), it is a failed production suggesting that the reach is not established, as shown in FIG. Is notified, the green flame effect FE is erased, and the pseudo continuous notice ends.

  When the failure effect is achieved, as shown in FIG. 72 (25), after the effect symbol 70a of “3 (rabbit)” is temporarily stopped in the central area, as shown in FIG. 72 (26), the three effect symbols 70a Is determined and stopped in the combination display mode "4 (chicken) 3 (rabbit) 3 (rabbit)" indicating a normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is stopped in the same combination of "433" as the identification section 70b of the production symbol 70a. Is displayed, and the blue character icon TH in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  After that, when the “chicken, rabbit, rabbit” of the decorative part 70c of the effect design 70a of the “4 (chicken) 3 (rabbit) 3 (rabbit)” displayed as the fixed stop performs a minute movement, the next variable production starts. Is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (27), with the start of the change, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C, and the first hold icon H11 is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from “2” to “1”.

  On the other hand, in the reach-inducing effect, the effect design 70a of “3 (rabbit)” is finally destroyed, and the effect design 70a of “4 (chicken)” is temporarily provided as shown in FIG. 72 (28). When the stop is informed and the success effect suggests the establishment of the reach, the green flame effect FE is erased, the pseudo continuous notice ends, and the reach effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (29), the normal design is performed after the left and right “4 (chicken)” effect symbols 70a perform the moving effect ME, and the normal reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (30). A predetermined transition effect SH is performed, and the temporarily stopped right and left “4 (chicken)” effect symbol 70a moves to the display area near the upper left and right ends as shown in FIG. The SP or SPSP reach effect is developed in a state where the size is reduced and displayed on the reduced symbol ZG of only the identification portion “4”.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (32), when the SPSP reach effect is developed, a battle effect is performed. In the display area including the central area, one ally character C2 and the enemy character T start a battle, and the blue chain effect CE is displayed in the display area near the left and right outer edges of the display unit 70.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (33), while the blue chain effect CE is continuously displayed, the ally character C2 performs a punch attack on the enemy character T to chase down the enemy character T. When the situation is reversed at the end of the battle and the ally character C2 is defeated by the enemy character T, as shown in FIG. 73 (34), it is notified that the ally character C2 is a defeat effect indicating that the ally character C2 has been defeated by the battle. At the same time, the chain effect CE is deleted, and the three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode “454” indicating the reach loss at the lower right corner.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (35), after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)” indicating the reach loss, FIG. ), The fixed symbol is displayed, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of “454” as the identification portion 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the blue character icon TH in the icon display area 70C is deleted. .

  On the other hand, in a state where the blue chain effect CE is continuously displayed and the ally character C2 and the enemy character T are performing a battle, as shown in FIG. When the word M1 of “CHANCE!” Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (38), the movable effect member 37 at the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow light emission, and the silver display color is displayed. Thus, the character image M2 of "CHANCE UP" and the halo flash GF are displayed from behind the character image M2, which suggests that the jackpot is expected to be highly expected. At this time, the chain effect CE is not displayed in order to make the player pay attention to the character image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (39), the number of friendly characters becomes two, and a character image M3 of “co-fighting” indicating that the number of friendly characters has become two is displayed. The effect CE changes from “blue” to “green”. Thereby, the player can surely recognize that the battle effect develops into an effect (winning effect) with a high jackpot winning expectation, and the expectation for the jackpot winning is increased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (40), with the green chain effect CE being continuously displayed, the two ally characters C2 and C3 and the enemy character T battle and perform the battle. "!" Is displayed, and when the ally characters C2 and C3 are trying to hunt down the enemy character T by performing the last attack technique for defeating the enemy character T, the determined validity period of the determined effect occurs. There is a sign effect that predicts (or expects) that there is a possibility of the event. Here, the determined effect is an operation effect that notifies the jackpot determination result based on the operation of the effect button 17 during the determined effective period that occurs during the variable effect.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (41), in the sign effect, the sign image KG including a plurality of arc-shaped effects gathering toward the center of the central region and a promotion sign display including three dark buttons simulating the effect button 17. Is displayed, and the three dark buttons gradually move to the center of the central area along the arc-shaped effect. When the indication effect is being performed, the chain effect CE is hidden.

  Then, at a timing that is a predetermined time before the determined effective period is set, the first button change effect is started. Specifically, when the button drive motor operates, the effect button 17 starts to change to a protruding state (specific state).

  Next, when the change of the effect button 17 to the protruding state (specific state) is completed, the determined validity period is set, and the dark button formed at the center of the central area is set as shown in FIG. It changes to a light-colored button that imitates the current production button 17, and shows a character image that prompts the operation of the production button 17 of “press!” In red display color and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the production button 17. While the operation promotion image SG is displayed (operation promotion effect), the button light-emitting LED is turned on, and the effect button 17 emits red light (light emission effect). When the operation promoting effect is being performed, the chain effect CE is hidden.

  Then, when the effect button 17 in the protruding state is operated, a loss determination effect is started as shown in FIG. 75 (43). Specifically, a failure image HG indicating loss is displayed without the operation of the movable effect member 73. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 75 (44), it is suggested that the character is a defeat effect indicating that the ally characters C2 and C3 have been defeated by the enemy character T, and the three reduced symbols ZG indicate the reach loss. The display is temporarily stopped in the display mode “454”.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (45), after the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the combination display mode “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)” indicating the reach loss, FIG. 75 (46) In this way, the fixed symbol is displayed and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "454" as the identification portion 70b of the effect symbol 70a, the blue character icon TH in the icon display area 70C is erased, and the symbol is lost. It is notified that there is.

  After that, when the “chicken, koala, chicken” in the decorative part 70c of the effect design 70a of “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)”, which has been confirmed and stopped, performs the minute movement, the next variable effect starts. Is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (43), with the start of the change, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C, and the first hold icon H11 is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from “2” to “1”.

  On the other hand, after it is notified that the battle effect is a defeat effect in FIG. 75 (44), as shown in FIG. 76 (51), a symbol 70b (identifying unit) of “5” After being temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is larger than the reduced symbol ZG of “4” and emphasized so as to be conspicuous, as shown in FIG. 76 (52), the character image M5 of the predetermined color “NT challenge” is displayed. Is displayed, and a halo flash CF in which a bright red flame spreads radially from the back of the character image M5 is displayed, and the character image M5 of "NT Challenge" is highlighted and a challenge effect is performed. Is done.

  When the character image M5 of the predetermined display color “NT Challenge” is displayed, the icon TH and the hold icon (including the icon display area and the hold icon display area) are not displayed, while the first and first characters are displayed. The 2 reserved number display areas 70E and 70F continue to be displayed.

  The character image M5 of “NT Challenge” is displayed in one of the display colors “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow”, and the challenge success degree indicated by the display color is “blue” <“red” <“ It is set to be higher in the order of "rainbow". When the rainbow-colored character image is displayed, it is suggested that the challenge success is rich (or confirmed), that is, the winning of the resurrection jackpot is rich (or confirmed), while the blue character image is displayed. Is displayed, it indicates that the chance of success of the challenge is low.

  The challenge effect is a resurrection effect that expects a possibility of resurrection to a jackpot after the reach loss. For example, a meter change effect is performed by a level meter display accompanying the continuous pressing of the effect button 17. In this case, if the level value of the level meter reaches MAX by the continuous pushing operation during the operation valid period, the challenge is successful and the resurrection jackpot is obtained, whereas if it does not reach MAX, the challenge fails. It becomes a loss. It is possible to perform a high-impact production that may change the player's disappointment about the reach loss and turn it into delight.

  When the challenge is successful, as shown in FIG. 76 (53), a character image M6 of "successful challenge" is displayed, and a halo flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M6 to display a character of "successful challenge". The image M6 is highlighted. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76 (54), the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow light emission, and the rainbow flash AF is displayed at the start of this accessory operation. Then, it is notified that the jackpot has been won (result notification effect). At this time, the three reduced symbols ZG are temporarily stopped in the same even symbol combination combination display mode “444” indicating a normal big hit. The blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (55), the character image M7 of “BONUS” is displayed, the halo flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M7, and the character image M7 of “BONUS” is highlighted. Is done. Further, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in a combination display mode indicating a normal jackpot of “444”.

  On the other hand, if the challenge fails, as shown in FIG. 76 (56), the reduced symbols ZG of “4” on the left and right respectively return to the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken)”, and “5 ( After the production pattern 70a of the “Koala)” is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 76 (57), the three production patterns 70a are in the combination display mode “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)” of the reach loss. At the same time as the fixed stop display, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of "454" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the blue character icon TH in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  After that, when the “chicken, koala, chicken” in the decorative part 70c of the effect design 70a of “4 (chicken) 5 (koala) 4 (chicken)”, which has been confirmed and stopped, performs the minute movement, the next variable effect starts. Is done. Further, as shown in FIG. 76 (58), with the start of the change, the first hold icon H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 shifts to the icon display unit 70C, and the icon display unit 70C displays the first hold icon H11. The icon TH is displayed, and the reserved number in the first reserved number display area 70E is reduced from “2” to “1”.

  On the other hand, when the protruding effect button 17 is operated in FIG. 74 (42), as shown in FIG. 77 (61-1), the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advanced position with rainbow light emission. , The rainbow flash AF is displayed on the entire display unit in accordance with the start of the accessory operation, and a big hit determination effect is performed. In addition, the combination display mode “444” in which the three reduced symbols ZG indicate a normal big hit is performed. , And the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area) is hidden.

  Further, after the effect button 17 in the protruding state is operated, the effect button 17 operated by operating the button vibration motor changes to the vibration state (specific state), and the sound output device 9 outputs the vibration sound. Thus, a second button change effect (operation effect) is performed. Furthermore, the button emission LED 17d changes the emission color and the effect button 17 emits a rainbow color, thereby performing a button emission effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (61-2), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation of the effect button 17, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 ends, the jackpot determination effect continues.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (61-3), with the start of the return operation of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end. Specifically, the operation of the button vibration motor 17c and the output of the vibration sound from the sound output device 9 are stopped, the button light emitting LED is turned off, and the light emission of the effect button 17 is stopped.

  Next, when the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed and the jackpot determination effect ends, as shown in FIG. 77 (62), a victory confirmation effect indicating that the ally character C2 has defeated the enemy character T. (Display of winning image) is performed. At this time, the temporary stop state of the reduced symbol ZG of “444” is continuously displayed, and the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) remains hidden.

  After the victory determination effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (63), the reduced symbol ZG of “444” is temporarily stopped at the effect symbol 70a of only the identification portion 70b of “444”, and the blue character icon TH is displayed. (Including the icon display area 70C) is displayed again. The special symbol TZ is changing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (64), the display size of the effect symbol 70a of “444” is enlarged, and the three effect symbols 70a are overlapped with each other, while the central symbol “4” of the effect symbol 70b (identifying unit) is displayed. ) Is temporarily stopped in a state where the display size is larger than the left and right “4” symbols 70b and emphasized so as to be conspicuous, and the radial flash BF is displayed from behind the three effect symbols 70a. At this time, the blue character icon TH (including the icon display area 70C) is not displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (65), a promotion effect (re-lottery effect) for notifying whether or not the promotion from the normal jackpot to the certain-change jackpot is performed. In this promotion effect, the three effect symbols 70a are synchronized and fluctuated again by the same combination of the effect symbols 70a (for example, all the numbers of the identification portion 70b of the effect symbol 70a are turned once ("1" → "2"). ······················································································································································· 組 み 合 わ せ 、 ３ 演. A promotion effect is performed to suggest whether or not to be promoted to a probable jackpot by stimulating whether to stop in any one of the combination display modes of the same odd-numbered pattern showing the mode and the probable jackpot.

  When the promotion effect is being performed, an operation promotion image BG for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed, and in the case of a successful promotion effect indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated and the promotion has been made to the probability change jackpot, FIG. As shown in 66), the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow light emission, and at the start of this accessory operation, the rainbow flash AF is displayed and promoted to a probable big hit. Is notified. At this time, the reduced symbol ZG is provisionally stopped in the same odd symbol combination combination display mode “555” indicating a probable big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (67), it is emphasized that the symbol 70b (identification unit) of “555” is temporarily stopped in a state where the symbol 70b (display unit) is enlarged to the display size that protrudes from the display unit 70, and that it is a probable big hit. It is displayed, and it is possible to enhance the sense of excitement that the player has won the jackpot. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 79 (68), the enlarged and rendered effect symbol 70a returns to the normal display size, and the same odd-numbered symbol matching combination display mode “5 (Koala) 5 (Koala) ) 5 (Koala) "and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of" 555 "as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

  Before the start of the jackpot game or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79 (69), the character image M8 of "BIGBONUS" is displayed, and the halo flash DF is displayed from behind the character image M8. , The character image M8 of “BIG BONUS” is highlighted, and the excitement of the player having won the certain jackpot can be further enhanced. In addition, the sound of the “big bonus” is output in accordance with the display of the character image M8, and the light emitter of the lamp is repeatedly turned on and off.

  Although not shown, in the successful promotion effect, the first button change effect, the second button change effect, the role action operation effect, and the button light emission effect are executed with the same effect timing and effect mode as the jackpot determination effect. It has become.

  On the other hand, if the promotion effect is performed in FIG. 78 (65) and the promotion button 17 is operated to indicate that the promotion button 17 is operated and the promotion is not to be promoted to the jackpot, as shown in FIG. The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in a state where the effect symbol 70a is enlarged to a display size protruding from the display unit 70, and a normal jackpot is highlighted. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 78 (71), the enlarged effect symbol 70a returns to the normal display size, and is temporarily stopped in the same even-number symbol combination combination display mode "444" indicating the normal jackpot. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (72), the effect symbol 70a of “4 (chicken) 4 (chicken) 4 (chicken)” is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed with the identification portion 70b of the effect symbol 70a. The same character combination "444" is stopped and displayed, and the blue character icon TH in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  Before the start of the jackpot game or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 79 (73), the character image M9 of “BONUS” is displayed, and the halo flash EF is displayed from behind the character image M9. , “BONUS” character image M9 is displayed in an emphasized manner, and it is possible to enhance the elation of the player having won the jackpot. In addition, the sound of the “bonus” is output in accordance with the display of the character image M9, and the light emitter of the lamp is repeatedly turned on and off.

  After the jackpot game is over, as shown in FIG. 80 (80), when the game is controlled in the probable change game state, a character image M10 of “Zan RUSH rush” notifying that the game enters the probable change mode is displayed. At the same time, the halo flash FF is displayed from behind the character image M10, the character image M10 of "ZANRU RUSH rush" is highlighted, and the player can reliably recognize that the game state has shifted to the certain-variable game state, and The game can be played in a state where the expectation of winning the jackpot is greatly increased. In addition, the sound of “Zrush RUSH rush” is output in accordance with the display of the character image M10, and the light emitter of the lamp is repeatedly turned on and off.

  In addition, when the game is controlled in the time saving game state after the big hit game is completed, a character image of “Chance Time Entry” is displayed to notify that the game is going into the time saving mode, and a halo is provided from behind the character image. A flash is displayed, and the time-saving mode determination information indicated by the character image of “Entering Chance Time” is highlighted.

  After entering the probable change mode, game balls continuously win at the second starting port 47, and as shown in FIG. 80 (81), four second holding icons H21 to H24 are displayed on the second display portions 70D1 to 70D4. In a state where the first holding icon is not displayed on the first display portions 70B1 to 70B4, the holding numeral "4" is further displayed on the second holding display region 70F and the holding numeral "4" is displayed on the first holding display region 70E. In the state where "0" is displayed, the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode "632" indicating the normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same "632" as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a. Stopped and displayed.

  The display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the probable change mode is different from the display mode of the effect symbol 70a in the normal mode, and includes the identification portion 70b of the numeral “1” to “9” and the decoration portion 70c of the frame display. It is configured. Further, the background image displayed in the probable mode has a display mode different from that of the background image displayed in the normal mode (image with a seasonal motif). For example, a background image with a space motif is displayed. .

  In the probable change mode, when an effect continuous announcement effect in which the fourth second hold memory is a prefetch target is performed, the fourth second hold icon is a bigger hit than the CD icon (normal icon) of “◎” The special icon “★” with high degree of expectation is displayed, and the fourth generation notification sound is generated for 0.5 seconds. Note that the output of the fourth generated notification sound (change notification sound) is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization (in synchronization) with the frame update timing at which the special icon “★” is displayed. In addition, in a plurality of variable effects performed before the variable effect to be pre-read, a super-shortened variable effect of loss is performed. In the ultra-shortened fluctuation effect, for example, the three effect symbols 70a are synchronized or shortly changed (2.0 seconds) in a state where it is difficult to see through or visually recognize, and then the fixed stop display is performed.

  After the frame display 70c of the effect design 70a of "632", which has been fixed and stopped, performs a small motion (or a small change such as a flashing of the frame display or a change in the color in the frame) by one rotation by rotation on the spot. 80, the character C1 is displayed in the center area and the blue ring-shaped effect LE surrounding the character C1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 80 (82). After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (83), the three effect symbols 70a of the super shortened variation are fixedly stopped and displayed in the combination display mode “253 frame display” indicating the normal loss, and the special symbol TZ is effected. It is stopped and displayed at the same “253” as the identification unit 70b of the symbol 70a.

  After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the “253 frame display” that has been fixed and stopped performs a minute motion, the next ultra-shortened fluctuation effect of the loss is started, and immediately after the start, FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, after the character C1 and the yellow ring shape effect LE are displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (85), the three effect symbols 70a of the super-shortened fluctuation show the normal loss and the combination display mode “443 frame”. The display is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at "443" which is the same as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

  After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the "443 frame display" that has been fixed and stopped has performed a minute movement, the next ultra-shortened fluctuation effect of the loss is started, and immediately after the start, FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, after the character C1 and the green ring-shaped effect LE are displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (87), the three effect symbols 70a of the ultra-shortened variation show the combination display mode “635 of the normal loss”. The display is fixed and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at "635" which is the same as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a.

  After the frame display 70c of the three effect symbols 70a of the fixed stop “635 frame display” performs a minute operation, the variable effect of the prefetch target is started. With the start of the fluctuation effect, the second hold icon H21 (special icon “★”) displayed on the first display unit 70D1 is shifted to the icon display unit 70C, and the special icon TH is displayed on the icon display unit 70C. “★” is displayed.

  Immediately after the start of the fluctuation effect of the prefetch target, as shown in FIG. 80 (88), the character C1 and the red ring shape effect LE are displayed, and further, the operation promotion image BG1 for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is displayed.

  Then, when the effect button 17 is operated, or when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG. 80 (89), the rainbow notifying that the jackpot winning expectation degree is high. The character image M11 of the color "Large chance!" Is displayed, the halo flash GF is displayed from behind the character image M11, and the character image M11 of "Large chance" is highlighted. Subsequently, a challenge effect is performed to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won. In addition, a chance sound is output in accordance with the display of the character image M11, and the light emitter of the lamp performs a lighting operation.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (90), in the challenge effect, the roulette R marked “A”, “B”, and “C” rotates in the K direction, and “A”, “B”, “C” Is performed, and then, according to the operation of the effect button 17, a roulette effect in which one of “A”, “B”, and “C” is determined is performed. Then, if "A" is determined, it is set to be a big hit. When the roulette effect is being performed, the reduced symbol ZG is temporarily stopped in the reach state “7 ↓ 7”.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (91), a promotion image BG2 indicating a character image urging the operation of the effect button 17 of “press!” Of the rainbow display color and a gauge indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 17 is displayed. When the effect button 17 is operated or when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 17, as shown in FIG. 81 (92), the rotational speed of the roulette gradually decreases, and the upper end of the roulette wheel When the selection determination effect in which “A” is stopped and displayed on the side is performed, as shown in FIG. 81 (93), the movable effect member 73 at the standby position moves to the advance position with rainbow light emission, The “success” character image M12 and the halo flash HF are displayed from behind the character image M12, and the “success” character image M12 is highlighted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (94), the effect symbol 70a of “777” is temporarily stopped in a state where it is enlarged to a display size protruding from the display unit, and it is emphasized that it is a probability variation big hit. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81 (95), the effect symbol 70a displayed in an enlarged scale returns to the normal display size, and the combination display mode “frame display of 777” of the odd-numbered symbol match indicating the probable change big hit is confirmed and stopped. At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination of “777” as the identification unit 70b of the effect symbol 70a, and the special icon TH in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

  Before the jackpot game starts or in the opening game of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 81 (96), a character image M13 of “SUPER BONUS” is displayed, and a halo flash IF is displayed from behind the character image M13. Then, the character image M13 of "SUPER BONUS" is highlighted. In addition, the sound of the “super bonus” is output in accordance with the display of the character image M13, and the light emitter of the lamp is repeatedly turned on and off.

  As described above, when the main production for directing the progress of the game is performed in the variable production, the highlight display color maintenance production by the effect image of a predetermined color for adding a visual production effect to the main production, and the main production A repeated highlighting effect by a halo flash image that emphasizes the display of the appearance is performed, and a staging effect that appeals to the player's sight enhances the player's attention to the main staging, thereby improving the interest of the staging and the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  In the highlight display color maintaining effect, when the pseudo continuous notice or the reach effect is executed in the variable effect, the main effect performed in the pseudo continuous notice or the reach effect with the display color of the effect image in the pseudo continuous notice or the reach effect. In addition to indicating the jackpot winning expectation degree, the display color that indicates the expectation level changes stepwise according to the production style of the main production that evolves according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous production and the reach production Therefore, it is possible to improve the production attraction by the production effect that enhances the player's expectation of winning the jackpot.

  In performing the highlight display color maintaining effect, the display area of the effect image shown in the embodiment is an example, and the effect image is displayed on the outer edges of the four sides constituting the outer edge of the display unit of the first image display device 70. May be highlighted, or an effect image including a character display may be displayed near the left and right (or up and down) outer edges of the display unit, and the effect image may be moved from bottom to top (or from left to right). May be highlighted by a telop type that flows through the screen.

  In the repeated emphasis production, a halo flash image (confirmed flash image) is displayed from behind the character image indicating the decision information such as the effect mode, the jackpot design, the jackpot determination result, and the type of the won jackpot, and the character image shows the confirmation. By giving a visual impact that makes the display of information stand out, it is possible to improve the entertainment effect by the effect of enhancing the player's elation.

  It should be noted that the presence or absence of the enhanced effect may be determined according to the type of the reach effect executed in the variable effect. For example, a setting may be made so that no emphasis effect is executed in the SP reach effect, and an emphasis effect is executed in the SPSP reach effect.

  In the SP reach production and the battle production performed in the SPSP reach production, the jackpot winning expectation may be increased as the ally character is changed to the ally character on the side with the higher jackpot expectation. The display color of the chain effect image may be associated with the type of the friend character. For example, in the case of the ally character A, the chain effect image is displayed in “blue”, and when the ally character B is changed to the ally character B having a higher jackpot expectation than the ally character A, the chain effect image is displayed in “green”.

  In the pseudo continuous notice, when the pseudo continuous production is performed with the normal reach in between, the pseudo continuous design of the “run” having a display size larger than the normal display size of the effect design in the pseudo continuous production is temporarily stopped. The effect design is changed again, and when the effect design changes again, the display color of the flame effect is changed.

(About the end timing of the operation of the effect button 17 during the fixed validity period)
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a timing chart in a case where the effect button 17 is operated two seconds after the occurrence of the determined effective period of the jackpot determined effect illustrated in FIG. 77 (61-1).

  At the timing of T0, the SPSP reach effect is executed. Next, at the timing of T1, a sign effect (see FIG. 74 (41)) is started. Then, at the timing of T2, which is a predetermined time before the determined effective period occurs, a button change effect in which the effect button 17 starts to change to a protruding state (specific state) is started (see FIG. 74 (41)).

  Next, when the transition to the protruding state (specific state) of the effect button 17 is completed at T3, a determined effective period is generated, and an operation promoting effect is started (FIG. 74 (42)). When the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T4, which is 2 seconds after the start of the game, the jackpot determination effect is started (see FIG. 77 (61-1)). ), And the second button change effect (operation effect) is performed by outputting a vibration sound (“bulburu”) from the audio output device 9. Further, a button light emission effect is performed (FIG. 77 (61)). -1)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, which is one second after the operation of the effect button 17, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 ends, the jackpot determination effect continues (see FIG. 77 (61-2)). Then, at the timing of T6, which is 1.7 seconds after the operation of the effect button 17, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of the return operation of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position. (See FIG. 77 (61-3)).

  Next, at the timing of T7, which is two seconds after the operation button 17 is operated, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, the big hit determination effect ends, and the victory confirmation effect starts. (See FIG. 77 (62)).

  After the operation of the effect button 17 that started the jackpot determination effect is temporarily terminated at the timing of T5, the effect button 17 is operated again until the timing of T7 when the jackpot determination effect is continued, and the operation is performed. Regardless of the timing that ends, the jackpot determination effect ends at the timing of T7. In other words, even if the effect button 17 is operated again between the timing of T5 and the timing of T7, the jackpot determination effect continues until the timing of T7 regardless of the operation start timing and the operation end timing. I do.

  Then, at the timing of T8 after a lapse of a fixed time (for example, one second) from the start of the victory determination effect, the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 77 (63)), and one second after the temporary stop. At the timing of T9, the three effect symbols 70a are fixedly stopped and displayed, and at the timing of T10, which is 0.5 seconds after the fixed stop display, the variable effect is ended.

  Next, the flow of the game before and after the execution of the jackpot determination effect when only the operation timing of the effect button 17 is different from that of FIG. 82 will be described using FIG. Here, the description of the same parts as in FIG. 82 will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 83, when the effect button 17 is operated at the timing of T4 ′, which is three seconds after the start of the determined validity period, the big hit determined effect is started. The effect button 17 changes to a vibration state (specific state) by operating the button vibration motor, and the second button change effect is performed by outputting a vibration sound from the audio output device 9. Further, a button light emission effect is performed.

  Next, at the timing of T5 ', which is 0.7 seconds after the operation of the effect button 17, the operation of the effect button 17 ends. Even if the operation of the effect button 17 ends, the jackpot determination effect continues. Then, at the timing of T6 ′, which is 1.7 seconds after the operation of the effect button 17, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect are ended with the start of the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position. .

  Next, at the timing of T7 ', which is two seconds after the operation of the effect button 17, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, and the big hit determination effect ends, and the big hit notification effect starts. You. Then, at a timing T8 'after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, one second) from the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification effect ends.

  As described above, with regard to the jackpot determination effect (second button change effect, button light emission effect, character action effect effect), is the operation end timing (operation timing) of the effect button 17 during the determined validity period the first timing? Regardless of whether it is the second timing later, the process ends at the same (common) timing after a lapse of a fixed time (2 seconds) after the operation of the effect button 17. Therefore, even if there is variation in the operation end timing of the effect button 17, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination effect over the same time, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of overlooking the jackpot determination effect. .

  Regarding the jackpot determination effect (second button change effect, button light emission effect, character action effect), the operation timing (operation timing) of the effect button 17 during the determined effective period is the first timing or later. Regardless of the second timing, the process ends at the same (common) timing, that is, after a lapse of a fixed time (2 seconds) from the operation of the effect button 17. Therefore, even if the operation timing of the effect button 17 varies, the jackpot determination effect can be executed over the same time, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of overlooking the jackpot determination effect.

  Next, the flow of the game before and after the execution of the jackpot determination effect when the effect button 17 is not operated during the determination effective period will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the description of the same parts as in FIG. 83 will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 84, if the effect period button 17 is not operated at the timing of T4 ', which is three seconds after the start of the effect period, and the effect period ends, the big hit effect is started. Further, at the end of the determined effective period, the effect button 17 returns from the protruding state to the normal state by operating the button driving motor 17b, and the effect button 17 vibrates (specified state) by operating the button vibration motor 17c. ), And a vibration sound is output from the audio output device 9 to perform the second button change effect. Further, a button light emission effect is performed.

  Next, at the timing of T6 ', which is 1.7 seconds after the end of the determined validity period, the second button change effect and the button light emission effect end with the start of the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position.

  Next, at the timing of T7 ', which is two seconds after the end of the determined validity period, the return of the movable effect member 73 to the standby position is completed, the jackpot determination effect ends, and the jackpot notification effect starts. Then, at a timing T8 'after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, one second) from the start of the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification effect ends.

  Thus, even if the determined effective period ends without operating the effect button 17, the second button change effect is performed from the end of the determined effective period and the button light emission effect is performed. In addition, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the operation of the effect button 17 is missed, and it is possible to reliably perform the jackpot determination effect regardless of whether the effect button 17 is operated.

<Contents of the invention described in the third embodiment>
<About highlighting>
In a conventional gaming machine, various game effects are performed in accordance with the progress of the game, but if an effect having a visually appealing effect with an impact to attract players is not performed, the game becomes monotonous. As a result, there is a problem that the interest in the game and the playability are reduced. For this reason, there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines in order to enhance the interest in gaming.

  ◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to a game is provided, and the effect control means includes a display means (first image display device 70). The main effect performed at a predetermined position (for example, an effect by symbol display, character display, character display, etc.), and using at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means (70) than the main effect. And a highlight effect (for example, an effect image, a flash image or the like) that emphasizes the main effect, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, An effect by design / character display or the like in the pseudo continuous notice in FIG. 53, a character display in the reach effect in FIG. 56), and a second main effect (for example, a display mode different from the first main effect). FIG. 64. The highlight effect is a first highlight effect performed based on the first main effect (e.g., FIG. 64). 53, an effect image of FIG. 56) and a second enhanced effect (for example, a flash image of FIGS. 63 and 64) performed based on the second main effect. Is performed, the emphasis effect is more easily changed to the emphasis effect in a different display mode when the first main effect is executed than when the first main effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to a player, and an effect control unit for executing a predetermined effect related to the game (effect control board 130 ), And the effect control means, based on the determination result of the determination means, a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and a predetermined position (for example, a central area) of the display means (first image display device 70) The main effect (for example, an effect by the symbol display, the character display, the character display, and the like shown in FIG. 52) performed in the display area including at least a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. And a highlight effect (for example, an effect image, a flash image, or the like illustrated in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, FIG. 56). Key shown And a second main effect (for example, an effect by character display shown in FIGS. 64 and 66) different from the first main effect in a display mode using characters, and the effect control means. The first main effect and the first emphasized effect (for example, the effect using the effect image shown in FIG. 56) and the second main effect and the second emphasized effect (for example, in FIGS. 64 and 66) During the predetermined variable effect period (for example, during the reach effect, a predetermined number of change zones), and during the execution period of the first emphasized effect, the first main effect. To a third main production having a display mode different from that of the first main production (for example, a production in which the number of characters shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 is increased or replaced) (for example, shown in FIGS. 57 and 58). Character-related effects) So that the it is possible to row. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to a player, and an effect control unit for executing a predetermined effect related to the game (the effect control board 130) ), The effect control means, based on the determination result of the determination means, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the symbol, and a predetermined position (for example, a central area) of the display means (first image display device 70) (A display area including a character display, a character display, a character display, and the like shown in FIG. 52) and a predetermined area in at least a part of the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. And a highlight effect (for example, an effect image, a flash image, and the like illustrated in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect, and the first main effect is a first main effect (for example, FIG. 73). Shown in The character production in the reach production) and, unlike the first main production, a second main production in a display mode using characters (character display of “CHANCE UP” in the reach production shown in FIG. 73). The effect control means includes the first main effect and the emphasis effect, and the second main effect and the emphasis effect during a predetermined fluctuation effect period (for example, during a reach effect, a predetermined number of change zones). During the predetermined variable production period, after the second main production is executed, when a specific state is reached (for example, reach loss eye, probable change big hit, big hit design), There is a case where it does not enter a state (a reach hit, a normal jackpot, a losing pattern), and in the case where the specific state is given, a third main production (for example, a display mode using a character different from the second main production) The character display of "NT Challenge" shown in FIG. 76, the character display of "Zan RUSH rush" shown in FIG. 80, the character display of "BONUS" shown in FIG. 76, and the emphasis effect (for example, a halo flash image) are executed. It is possible. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  第 As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, there is provided an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect relating to a game, and the effect control means is provided with a display means (first image display device 70). ) At a predetermined position (for example, a display area including a central area) (for example, a display by a symbol display, a character display, or a character display shown in FIG. 52) and an outer edge of the display means than the main display. And a highlight effect (for example, an effect image, a flash image, or the like illustrated in FIG. 52) that emphasizes the main effect using at least a part of the predetermined area in the direction. A first main effect performed during the execution of the emphasized effect (for example, an effect by the character A shown in FIG. 73) and a second main effect performed during the execution of the emphasized effect (for example, in FIGS. 73 and 74). The effect control means changes the first main effect to the second main effect through a predetermined transition effect (for example, a chance-up notice shown in FIG. 73). It is possible to do that. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, a storage unit (main RAM 110c) capable of storing determination information acquired by satisfaction of an acquisition condition as a hold storage, and a hold storage stored in the storage unit Based on the first hold information, the first hold information (for example, hold icons H11 to H14 shown in FIG. 67) and the second hold information (for example, the number hold shown in FIG. 67) having a display mode different from the first hold information are displayed. Displayable information display means (for example, first to fourth display units 70B1 to 70B4 shown in FIG. 67, number-of-reserve display areas 70E and 70F), and effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a predetermined effect related to the game ), And the effect control means is a main effect performed at a predetermined position (for example, a display area including a central area) of the display means (first image display device 70) (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 52). 52, a display effect, a character display, a character display, and the like) and an enhanced effect that emphasizes the main effect by using at least a part of a predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 52). An effect image, an effect using a flash image, or the like) can be executed, and the main effect is a first main effect (for example, an effect by a character in a pseudo continuous notice shown in FIG. 53, a reach effect shown in FIG. 56). And the second main production (for example, a production by character display in a jackpot production shown in FIG. 64) having a display mode different from that of the first main production. According to the first main effect, a first display mode (for example, a pseudo yellow effect image shown in FIG. 70, a blue effect image in a reach effect shown in FIG. 73) in a predetermined first period, The table After that, in a predetermined second period, a second display mode different from the first display mode (for example, a pseudo 2 green effect image shown in FIG. 71, a green effect image in the reach effect shown in FIG. 73) ) Is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (a halo flash image shown in FIGS. 76 and 79) in a predetermined third period according to the second main effect. A second effect (for example, flash image display) to be displayed, wherein the information display means displays the first hold information and the second hold information in the first effect, and in the second effect, The second suspension information is displayed, while the first suspension information is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a sixth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to a player, and an effect control unit for executing a predetermined effect related to the game (the effect control unit 130) ), The effect control means, based on the determination result of the determination means, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the symbol, a predetermined position of the display means (first image display device 70) (for example, the central area (A display area including a character display, a character display, a character display, and the like shown in FIG. 52) and a predetermined area in at least a part of the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect. The emphasis effect (for example, an effect image, a flash image, and the like shown in FIG. 52) for emphasizing the main effect, a movable effect for operating a movable member (movable effect member 73), and the special game are performed. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue display effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like) indicating the degree of expectation, and the effect control means includes a first main effect (for example, an effect using the character A shown in FIG. 73) and the effect. An enhanced effect (for example, an effect using the blue effect image shown in FIG. 73), a second main effect (for example, an effect using the character B shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) and the enhanced effect (for example, FIGS. The effect by the green effect image shown in FIG. 74 can be executed during a predetermined variable effect period (for example, during a reach effect, a predetermined number of change zones), and during the predetermined variable effect period from the first main effect. When the specific suggestion effect (for example, a high expectation dialogue display effect shown in FIG. 73) is executed during the predetermined variable effect period, the specific suggestion effect can be changed to the second main effect. Run So that the easy to perform the movable effect than without. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About button change effects>
Conventional gaming machines generally determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of an effect symbol based on the result of the determination. In such a gaming machine, a change effect in which an operation unit that can be operated by a player can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and the operation unit is changed to a specific state during a fluctuation effect is executed. There was something like that. However, such a gaming machine has a problem in that the effect of the effect using the operation unit is low, and the interest in the game is poor.

  ◆ As a first configuration for solving the above-described problem, an effect of controlling a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol based on a determination result as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine equipped with control means, the game machine comprises operation means operable by a player, wherein the operation means can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and the effect control means sets the operation means in a specific state. A change effect that can be changed can be executed, a first effective period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game is executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the special game according to the operation of the operation means. A second validity period for notifying whether or not is executed can be generated during the fluctuation effect, and the special game is not executed if the operating means is operated during the first validity period. The first probability When the special game is executed, the change effect is executed at a second probability higher than the first probability, and the operation means is operated during the occurrence of the second valid period. When the special game is not executed, the change effect is not executed, and when the special game is executed, the change effect is executed, and the operation unit is operated during the execution of the change effect. In this case, regardless of the end timing of the operation, the change effect is terminated at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-described problem, an effect of controlling a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of effect symbols based on a result of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine equipped with control means, the game machine comprises operation means operable by a player, wherein the operation means can be changed between a normal state and a specific state, and the effect control means sets the operation means in a specific state. A change effect that can be changed can be executed, a first effective period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game is executed according to the operation of the operation means, and the special game according to the operation of the operation means. A second validity period for notifying whether or not is executed can be generated during the fluctuation effect, and the special game is not executed if the operating means is operated during the first validity period. The first probability When the special game is executed, the change effect is executed at a second probability higher than the first probability, and the operation means is operated during the occurrence of the second valid period. When the special game is not executed, the change effect is not executed, and when the special game is executed, the change effect is executed, and the operation unit is operated during the execution of the change effect. In this case, regardless of the end timing of the operation, the change effect is ended at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the second effective period. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  ◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-described problem, an effect of controlling a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol based on a determination result of whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is provided. In a gaming machine equipped with control means, the game machine includes operation means operable by a player, the operation means can be changed to a normal state and a specific state, and can emit light, and the effect control means, A change effect for changing the operation means to a specific state and a light emission effect for causing the operation means to emit light in a predetermined mode can be executed. The change effect includes a first change effect and the first change effect. A first validity period for notifying the degree of expectation that the special game is executed in response to the operation of the operation means, including a second change effect in which the operation means is in a specific state for a long time; The special game according to the operation A second validity period for notifying whether or not to be executed is generated during the fluctuation effect, and the light-emitting effect is executed during the first validity period, and the operation is performed during the first validity period. The first change effect can be executed in response to the operation of the means, the light emission effect is executed in the second valid period, and the operating means is operated during the occurrence of the second valid period. The second change effect can be executed in response to the light emission effect, and when the light emission effect and the second change effect are being executed, the light emission effect is ended in accordance with the end of the second change effect. I have. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that both the production button 17 and the production lever are provided, and the operation button 17 is operated when the operation production is the announcement production (line announcement), and when the operation production is the result notification production (fixed production, promotion production). The effect lever may be operated or vice versa.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a spinning-type gaming machine (a so-called slot machine). Further, the present invention can be used for a rock ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

  In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 gaming machine 70 first image display device 130 effect control board

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with effect control means for executing a predetermined effect related to the game,
The effect control means,
A main production performed at a predetermined position of the display means,
Emphasizing effect of emphasizing the main effect using at least a part of the predetermined area in the outer edge direction of the display means than the main effect,
The main production is
A first main effect performed during the execution of the emphasized effect;
A second main effect performed during execution of the emphasized effect, and
The effect control means,
It is possible to change from the first main production to the second main production via a predetermined transition production,
A gaming machine characterized by that: